WO2019214577A1 - Signal transmission method and device - Google Patents

Signal transmission method and device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2019214577A1
WO2019214577A1 PCT/CN2019/085667 CN2019085667W WO2019214577A1 WO 2019214577 A1 WO2019214577 A1 WO 2019214577A1 CN 2019085667 W CN2019085667 W CN 2019085667W WO 2019214577 A1 WO2019214577 A1 WO 2019214577A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
symbol
slot
mini
slots
dmrs
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2019/085667
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
吴霁
张佳胤
朱俊
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from CN201810797873.8A external-priority patent/CN110474752B/en
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2019214577A1 publication Critical patent/WO2019214577A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of wireless communications technologies, and in particular, to a signal transmission method and apparatus.
  • Devices operating in unlicensed bands can detect whether the channel is idle and access the channel for operation without authorization.
  • the R13 version of 3GPP specifies a channel contention access mechanism using LBT (Listen-Before-Talk).
  • An eNB operating in an unlicensed band may start the LBT at any time, and the LBT may end at any time due to the occurrence of interference and duration uncertainty of other systems. How to effectively utilize the time domain resources after successful LBT is a concern of this application.
  • the present application provides a signal transmission method, which can be applied to uplink or downlink, including performing LBT; after the LBT is successful, transmitting the allowed mini-slot on one or more time domain resources of less than one slot slot. Combination; the starting symbol position of each mini-slot in the allowed mini-slot combination, denoted as the first set of symbol positions.
  • each of the mini-slots includes a control resource set CORESET that carries control signaling, where the control signaling includes: a first common control signaling, where the first common control signaling is used to indicate a configuration of the MCOT. Information; or other control signaling.
  • the first set of symbol positions is one or more of the following set of symbol positions: ⁇ 1, 3, 7 ⁇ , ⁇ 3, 7, 10 ⁇ , ⁇ 3, 7 ⁇ , ⁇ 7, 10 ⁇ , ⁇ 5,7,12 ⁇ , ⁇ 5,7 ⁇ , ⁇ 7,12 ⁇ .
  • the LBT succeeds, it is also possible to send on one or more 14-symbol time domain resources: a complete slot or a combination of other mini-slots, each of the other mini-slot combinations
  • the starting symbol position of the mini-slot is recorded as a second set of symbol positions; preferably, the second set of symbol positions is different from the first set of symbol positions.
  • the second set of symbol positions may also differ from the first set of symbol positions.
  • the method further comprises: transmitting an indication of a starting position of the maximum channel occupation time MCOT.
  • the communication resources can be utilized efficiently and the processing complexity on the receiving side can be reduced.
  • an apparatus that can perform the above method is provided, and in addition, a transmitting method and apparatus on the receiving side are also provided.
  • the downlink only method on the network side, includes: after the LBT succeeds, transmitting a control resource set CORESET on one or more time domain resources of less than one slot slot; the CORESET is located in a specified The symbol position of the CORESET is allowed to be transmitted; (101) the CORESET scheduled data is transmitted (102) according to the CORESET.
  • the communication resources can be utilized efficiently and the processing complexity on the receiving side can be reduced.
  • the specified symbol position that allows the CORESET to be carried is recorded as a first set of symbol positions, which is one or more of the following set of symbol positions: ⁇ 1, 3, 7 ⁇ , ⁇ 3, 7, 10 ⁇ , ⁇ 3, 7 ⁇ , ⁇ 7, 10 ⁇ , ⁇ 5, 7, 12 ⁇ , ⁇ 5, 7 ⁇ , ⁇ 7, 12 ⁇ .
  • the method further includes: transmitting an indication of the currently used first set of symbol locations.
  • the other CORESETs and the data scheduled by the other CORESETs may be sent and sent on the time domain resources of the one or more complete slots, where the symbol positions of the other CORESETs are recorded as the second symbol positions.
  • the second set of symbol positions is different from the first set of symbol positions.
  • the second set of symbol positions is a standard set of symbol positions.
  • the method can also include transmitting an indication of a starting location for the MCOT.
  • the present application also provides a corresponding processing method on the terminal side, which performs CORESET detection at a specified symbol position that allows CORESET to be carried, and may not perform detection at other locations, thereby saving resources and saving power.
  • the present application provides a device on the network side, including devices such as devices or boards, and terminal devices, including terminals, chips, or other possible devices.
  • a communication system comprising: a network device and a terminal, wherein: the network device can be the aforementioned network device.
  • the network device can be the aforementioned network device.
  • a computer readable storage medium having instructions stored thereon that, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the signal transmission methods described above.
  • a computer program product comprising instructions for causing a computer to perform the signal transmission method described above is provided when it is run on a computer.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication system provided by the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram of a hardware architecture of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram of a hardware architecture of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application.
  • 4A-4B are schematic diagrams of a Type A/Type B multi-carrier LBT mechanism involved in the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a structure of a slot frame conforming to LTE according to the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a structure corresponding to a micro-slot frame in an NR according to the present application.
  • 7a, 7b, 7c and 7d are schematic diagrams showing the flow of the method involved in the present application.
  • 8a is a possible starting point example 1 corresponding to the non-complete slot scheduling supported by the NR-U communication system provided by the present application;
  • FIG. 10 is a functional block diagram of a wireless communication system, a terminal, and a network device provided by the present application.
  • the wireless communication system 100 can operate in a licensed band or in an unlicensed band. As can be appreciated, the use of unlicensed frequency bands can increase the system capacity of the wireless communication system 100.
  • the wireless communication system 100 includes: one or more base stations 101, such as network devices (such as gNBs), eNodeBs or WLAN access points, one or more terminals (Terminal) 103, and Core network 115. among them:
  • Network device 101 can be used to communicate with terminal 103 under the control of a network device controller (e.g., a base station controller) (not shown).
  • a network device controller e.g., a base station controller
  • the network device controller may be part of the core network 115 or may be integrated into the network device 101.
  • the network device 101 can be used to transmit control information or user data to the core network 115 via a blackhaul interface (e.g., S1 interface) 113.
  • a blackhaul interface e.g., S1 interface
  • Network device 101 can communicate wirelessly with terminal 103 via one or more antennas. Each network device 101 can provide communication coverage for each respective coverage area 107.
  • the coverage area 107 corresponding to the access point may be divided into a plurality of sectors, wherein one sector corresponds to a part of coverage (not shown).
  • the network device 101 and the network device 101 can also communicate with each other directly or indirectly via a blackhaul link 211.
  • the backhaul link 111 may be a wired communication connection or a wireless communication connection.
  • the network device 101 may include: a base transceiver station (Base Transceiver Station), a wireless transceiver, a basic service set (BSS), and an extended service set (Extended Service Set, ESS). ), NodeB, eNodeB, network device (such as gNB) and so on.
  • the wireless communication system 100 can include several different types of network devices 101, such as a macro base station, a micro base station, and the like.
  • the network device 101 can apply different wireless technologies, such as a cell radio access technology, or a WLAN radio access technology.
  • Terminals 103 may be distributed throughout wireless communication system 100, either stationary or mobile.
  • the terminal 103 may include: a mobile device, a mobile station, a mobile unit, a wireless unit, a remote unit, a user agent, a mobile client, and the like.
  • a terminal can also be understood as a terminal device.
  • the wireless communication system 100 may be an LTE communication system capable of operating in an unlicensed frequency band, such as an LTE-U system, or a new air interface communication system capable of operating in an unlicensed frequency band, such as an NRU system, or may be a future. Other communication systems operating in unlicensed bands.
  • the wireless communication system 100 can also include a WiFi network.
  • the terminal 300 may include: an input and output module (including an audio input and output module 318, a key input module 316, and a display 320, etc.), a user interface 302, one or more terminal processors 304, a transmitter 306, and a receiving The 308, the coupler 310, the antenna 314, and the memory 312. These components can be connected by bus or other means, and FIG. 2 is exemplified by a bus connection. among them:
  • Communication interface 301 can be used by terminal 300 to communicate with other communication devices, such as base stations.
  • the base station may be the network device 400 shown in FIG.
  • Communication interface 301 refers to an interface between terminal processor 304 and a transceiver system (consisting of transmitter 306 and receiver 308), such as the X1 interface in LTE.
  • the communication interface 301 may include: a Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) (2G) communication interface, a Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) (3G) communication interface, and One or more of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) (4G) communication interfaces and the like may also be a communication interface of 4.5G, 5G or a future new air interface.
  • the terminal 300 may be configured with a wired communication interface 301, such as a Local Access Network (LAN) interface.
  • LAN Local Access Network
  • the antenna 314 can be used to convert electromagnetic energy in a transmission line into electromagnetic waves in free space, or to convert electromagnetic waves in free space into electromagnetic energy in a transmission line.
  • the coupler 310 is configured to divide the mobile communication signal received by the antenna 314 into multiple channels and distribute it to a plurality of receivers 308.
  • Transmitter 306 can be used to transmit signals to signals output by terminal processor 304, such as modulating the signal in a licensed band or modulating a signal in an unlicensed band.
  • Receiver 308 can be used to perform reception processing on the mobile communication signals received by antenna 314. For example, the receiver 308 can demodulate a received signal that has been modulated on an unlicensed band, and can also demodulate a received signal that is modulated on a licensed band.
  • transmitter 306 and receiver 308 can be viewed as a wireless modem.
  • the number of the transmitter 306 and the receiver 308 may each be one or more.
  • the terminal 300 may also include other communication components such as a GPS module, a Bluetooth module, a Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) module, and the like. Not limited to the above-described wireless communication signals, the terminal 300 can also support other wireless communication signals such as satellite signals, short-wave signals, and the like. Not limited to wireless communication, the terminal 300 may be configured with a wired network interface (such as a LAN interface) to support wired communication.
  • a wired network interface such as a LAN interface
  • the input and output module can be used to implement interaction between the terminal 300 and the user/external environment, and can mainly include an audio input and output module 318, a key input module 316, a display 320, and the like.
  • the input and output module may further include: a camera, a touch screen, a sensor, and the like.
  • the input and output modules communicate with the terminal processor 304 through the user interface 302.
  • Memory 312 is coupled to terminal processor 304 for storing various software programs and/or sets of instructions.
  • memory 312 can include high speed random access memory, and can also include non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices.
  • the memory 312 can store an operating system (hereinafter referred to as a system) such as an embedded operating system such as ANDROID, IOS, WINDOWS, or LINUX.
  • the memory 312 can also store a network communication program that can be used to communicate with one or more additional devices, one or more terminal devices, one or more network devices.
  • the memory 312 can also store a user interface program, which can realistically display the content image of the application through a graphical operation interface, and receive user control operations on the application through input controls such as menus, dialog boxes, and keys. .
  • the memory 312 can be used to store an implementation of the signal transmission method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application on the terminal 300 side.
  • the signal transmission method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application please refer to the subsequent embodiments.
  • Terminal processor 304 can be used to read and execute computer readable instructions. Specifically, the terminal processor 304 can be used to invoke a program stored in the memory 312, such as the implementation of the signal transmission method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application on the terminal 300 side, and execute the instructions contained in the program.
  • the terminal 300 can be the terminal 103 in the wireless communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1, and can be implemented as a mobile device, a mobile station, a mobile unit, a wireless unit, a remote unit, and a user agent. , mobile client and more.
  • the terminal 300 shown in FIG. 2 is only one implementation of the present application. In an actual application, the terminal 300 may further include more or fewer components, which are not limited herein.
  • FIG. 3 illustrates a network device 400 provided by some embodiments of the present application.
  • network device 400 can include a communication interface 403, one or more base station processors 401, a transmitter 407, a receiver 409, a coupler 411, an antenna 413, and a memory 405. These components can be connected by bus or other means, and FIG. 3 is exemplified by a bus connection. among them:
  • Communication interface 403 can be used by network device 400 to communicate with other communication devices, such as terminal devices or other base stations.
  • the terminal device may be the terminal 300 shown in FIG. 2.
  • Communication interface 301 refers to an interface between base station processor 401 and a transceiver system (consisting of transmitter 407 and receiver 409), such as the S1 interface in LTE.
  • the communication interface 403 may include: a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) (2G) communication interface, a Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) (3G) communication interface, and a Long Term Evolution (LTE) (4G) communication interface, etc.
  • GSM Global System for Mobile Communications
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • the network device 400 may also be configured with a wired communication interface 403 to support wired communication.
  • the backhaul link between one network device 400 and other network devices 400 may be a wired communication connection.
  • the antenna 413 can be used to convert electromagnetic energy in a transmission line into electromagnetic waves in free space, or to convert electromagnetic waves in free space into electromagnetic energy in a transmission line.
  • the coupler 411 can be used to divide the mobile pass signal into multiple channels and distribute it to a plurality of receivers 409.
  • the transmitter 407 can be used to transmit a signal output by the base station processor 401, such as modulating the signal in a licensed band or modulating a signal in an unlicensed band.
  • the receiver 409 can be used to perform reception processing on the mobile communication signal received by the antenna 413.
  • the receiver 409 can demodulate a received signal that has been modulated on an unlicensed band, and can also demodulate a received signal that is modulated on a licensed band.
  • transmitter 407 and receiver 409 can be viewed as a wireless modem.
  • the number of the transmitter 407 and the receiver 409 may each be one or more.
  • Memory 405 is coupled to base station processor 401 for storing various software programs and/or sets of instructions.
  • memory 405 can include high speed random access memory, and can also include non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices.
  • the memory 405 can store an operating system (hereinafter referred to as a system) such as an embedded operating system such as uCOS, VxWorks, or RTLinux.
  • the memory 405 can also store a network communication program that can be used to communicate with one or more additional devices, one or more terminal devices, one or more network devices.
  • the base station processor 401 can be used to perform wireless channel management, implement call and communication link establishment and teardown, and control the handoff of user equipment in the control area.
  • the base station processor 401 may include: an Administration Module/Communication Module (AM/CM) (a center for voice exchange and information exchange), and a Basic Module (BM) (for Complete call processing, signaling processing, radio resource management, radio link management and circuit maintenance functions), code conversion and sub-multiplexer (TCSM) (for multiplexing demultiplexing and code conversion functions) )and many more.
  • AM/CM Administration Module/Communication Module
  • BM Basic Module
  • TCSM code conversion and sub-multiplexer
  • base station processor 401 can be used to read and execute computer readable instructions. Specifically, the base station processor 401 can be used to invoke a program stored in the memory 405, for example, the implementation of the signal transmission method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application on the network device 400 side, and execute the instructions included in the program.
  • the network device 400 can be the network device 101 in the wireless communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1, and can be implemented as a base transceiver station, a wireless transceiver, a basic service set (BSS), and an extended service set (ESS). , NodeB, eNodeB, etc.
  • Network device 400 can be implemented as several different types of base stations, such as macro base stations, micro base stations, and the like.
  • Network device 400 can apply different wireless technologies, such as cell radio access technology, or WLAN radio access technology.
  • the network device 400 shown in FIG. 3 is only one implementation of the present application. In actual applications, the network device 400 may further include more or fewer components, which are not limited herein.
  • the NRU system adopts the LBT channel contention access mechanism, and the LBT process and parameters are specified in the R13 version of 3GPP.
  • Figures 4A-4B illustrate two types of LBT listening mechanisms.
  • the Type A LBT device can perform independent backoff on multiple component carriers (CCs).
  • CCs component carriers
  • the backoff is completed on a certain carrier, the transmission is delayed to wait for other still backoffs.
  • Member carrier After all the LBT-enabled carriers are backed off, the device needs to perform an additional one-shot CCA (25us clear channel assessment) to ensure that all carriers are idle; if all carriers are idle, the eNB transmits simultaneously on the idle carriers.
  • CCA 25us clear channel assessment
  • the Type B LBT device performs backoff only on a selected component carrier, and performs one-shot CCA (25us clear channel assessment) on other component carriers when the backoff ends. If the component carrier is idle, data transmission is performed; if the component carrier is not idle, data transmission cannot be performed on the component carrier at this time.
  • CCA 25us clear channel assessment
  • the device performing LBT may be LTE LAA, WiFi, NRU or other communication device operating in an unlicensed frequency band.
  • the interference received by the device in the LBT is from the WiFi system.
  • the interference received by the LBT device may also come from the LTE LAA, NRU or other communication system operating in the unlicensed frequency band. limit.
  • the LBT listening mechanism employed by the NR U system may also vary without affecting the implementation of the present application.
  • the frame structure applied in this application may be a frame structure of LTE or its evolved versions.
  • a typical frame structure specified by LTE includes 14 OFDM symbols (hereinafter referred to as symbols) in a scheduling slot, and the first 1, 2 or 3 symbols carry control information. (DCI), after 11, 12 or -13 symbols carry data.
  • DCI control information
  • a micro-slot is introduced, which may be 2, 4, or 7 OFDM symbols in length.
  • one slot contains three 4-sign long mini-slots and one 2-symbol long mini-slot. Of course, it can also be a combination of other mini-slots.
  • the control resource set (CORESET) of the mini-slot is carried from the first n symbols of the first symbol, and is used to carry the scheduling information (DCI) of the mini-slot.
  • n is a natural number and is smaller than the number of symbols in the mini-slot.
  • n does not exceed 3.
  • the present application provides a signal transmission method, which provides a technical solution for transmitting a control resource set and corresponding data on a time domain resource after successful LBT.
  • a technical solution for detecting on the receiving side is provided.
  • the transmitting side may be uplink or downlink, and mainly includes:
  • the 101a performs LBT. Specifically, it may be a network device or a user equipment UE.
  • the 102a after the success of the LBT, transmitting a combination of allowed mini-slots on one or more time domain resources of less than one slot slot; the start of each mini-slot in the allowed mini-slot combination
  • the symbol position is recorded as the first symbol position set.
  • the LBT it is also possible to send on one or more 14-symbol time domain resources: a complete slot or a combination of other mini-slots, each of the other mini-slot combinations
  • the starting symbol position of the mini-slot is recorded as a second set of symbol positions; preferably, the second set of symbol positions is different from the first set of symbol positions.
  • the duration of the last non-complete slot of the uplink transmission resource configured by the UE is less than 14 symbols, and the non-complete slot includes multiple mini-slots, and the symbol position of each mini-slot is recorded as the third.
  • a collection of symbol locations are examples of symbols.
  • the embodiment of the present invention may also be described as:
  • a configuration control resource set (CORESET); wherein, for a time domain resource of less than 1 slot slot, the control resource set (CORESET) is located at a specified symbol position that may (allow) bearer CORESET.
  • the symbol position that allows CORESET can be specified by the standard.
  • the above-mentioned time domain resources of less than 1 time slot may be referred to as non-slots.
  • the MCOT is the maximum channel occupation time, that is, the maximum duration of time after the device LBT succeeds in running the occupied channel for transmission.
  • a time domain resource of less than 14 symbols (non-complete slot) relative to the slot boundary in the MCOT in the above MCOT is hereinafter referred to as a first time domain resource, one or more relative to a slot boundary.
  • the time domain resource of 14 symbols (complete slot) is called the second time domain resource; the non-complete slot located at the end position in the MCOT is hereinafter referred to as the third time domain resource.
  • the other CORESETs and the data scheduled by the other CORESETs may be sent and sent on the time domain resources of the one or more complete slots, where the symbol positions of the other CORESETs are recorded as the second symbol positions. set.
  • the CORESET includes a common search space common search space and a UE-specific search space UE-specific search space.
  • the common search space is used to carry common control signaling and/or UE-specific control signaling
  • the UE-specific search space is used to carry UE-specific control signaling.
  • the common control signaling includes a first common control signaling, where the first common control signaling is used to indicate configuration information of the MCOT, such as an MCOT remaining duration or an uplink and downlink configuration of the MCOT.
  • the first common control signaling is used to indicate configuration information of a channel Occupancy Time (COT), where the COT refers to a time when the device LBT can occupy the channel for transmission, which may be
  • COT channel Occupancy Time
  • the network side is configured by control signaling, which is referred to as MCOT remaining duration in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the common control signaling includes a second common control signaling, where the second common control signaling is used to indicate that the current time slot belongs to the first time domain resource, and the second time domain resource is still the MCOT tail part time slot. (called the third time domain resource).
  • the common control signaling includes a third common control signaling, where the third common control signaling is used to indicate whether the current time slot belongs to the third time domain resource.
  • the common control signaling includes a fourth common control signaling, where the fourth common control signaling is used to indicate a CORESET location of the next configuration.
  • the standard may define one of the foregoing common control signalings, that is, it can efficiently indicate the set of symbol positions where the CORESET is located, thereby reducing the blind detection overhead of the UE.
  • the present application only relates to the time domain (ie, symbol symble) and does not involve the transmission mode in the frequency domain.
  • CORESET In the frequency domain, it is also possible for CORESET to be located on a partial sub-band.
  • the symbol position of the above call may be the same symbol position as the CORESET.
  • the data is transmitted on other sub-bands at the same symbol position;
  • the symbol position of the data called by the control signaling may also be the symbol position after the CORESET.
  • the symbol position of the above-mentioned standard for the specified bearer control information for the first time domain resource is hereinafter referred to as the first symbol position set.
  • the starting symbol position is recorded as the first symbol position set.
  • the method further includes: receiving, on one or more 14-symbol time domain resources, a complete slot or a combination of other mini-slots, each mini-slot of the combination of the other mini-slots
  • the starting symbol position is recorded as a second set of symbol positions.
  • the second set of symbol positions is different from the first set of symbol positions, and of course, may be the same.
  • the following behavior example such as the UE or other device is the receiving side, referring to FIG. 7b, in this embodiment includes:
  • the method includes: common control signaling and/or UE-specific control signaling of a common search space, and UE-specific control signaling carried in a control resource set CORESET UE-specific search space;
  • control signaling is not retrieved on symbol 0 or symbol 0, 1 or symbols 0, 1, and 2, in a time domain resource of less than 1 slot, at least in the first set of symbol locations Whether there is control signaling (202) on consecutive n symbols from each symbol, n is 1 or 2 or 3.
  • control signaling detection is performed on at least the aforementioned first set of symbol locations on the first time domain resource.
  • the other CORESETs and the data scheduled by the other CORESETs may be sent and sent on the time domain resources of the one or more complete slots, where the symbol positions of the other CORESETs are recorded as the second symbol positions. set;
  • the specific detection process is generally performed sequentially on each symbol of the union of the first symbol position set and the second symbol position set.
  • the detection overhead can be reduced to some extent.
  • the UE first attempts to detect control signaling at symbol 0 (at the slot boundary). If no control signaling is detected, it will jump to symbol 1 to continue the detection. If symbol 1 has not been detected, it will jump to symbol 3 detection if symbol 3 If it is not detected yet, it jumps to the symbol 7 to detect again, and the UE does not blindly check the control signaling in other symbols to save energy.
  • the first common control signaling is detected at symbol 0, determining the second time domain resource and/or the third time of the MCOT or COT duration according to the MCOT or the remaining duration of the COT carried by the first common control signaling
  • the time domain resource (at this time, there is no possibility of having the first time domain resource), and the corresponding time domain resource location is detected according to the corresponding CORESET symbol position set.
  • the first symbol position set is not involved, and the detection is not performed on the first symbol position set ⁇ 1, 3, 7 ⁇ ; the detection may be performed according to relevant standards, or the application is adopted.
  • the second set of symbol positions in other embodiments is detected.
  • the third time domain resource it is required to detect according to the union of the CORESET symbol position set corresponding to the first and second time domain resources. I will not repeat them later.
  • the bearer according to the second common control signaling is used to indicate that the current time slot belongs to the second time domain resource or the third time domain resource, according to the current time.
  • Each set of symbol locations corresponding to each time domain resource in which the slot is located performs control signaling detection.
  • the third common control signaling is detected at symbol 0
  • the union of the set of CORESET symbol locations corresponding to the domain resource and the second time domain resource is detected for control signaling monitoring; if not belonging to the third time domain resource, the detection is performed according to the second set of symbol locations.
  • control signaling detection is performed at the symbol position where the next CORESET indicated by the fourth common control signaling.
  • control signaling is detected on symbol 0 (eg, located in the third time domain resource), but none of the first, second, third, and fourth common control signaling is detected, Equivalent to not detecting any signaling that facilitates subsequent CORESET monitoring, detecting based on the union of the first time domain resource and the CORESET symbol location set corresponding to the second time domain resource.
  • the first time domain resource and the second time domain resource in the duration of the MCOT or the COT are determined according to the MCOT or the COT related information carried by the first common control signaling. And / or third time domain resources, and detected in the corresponding time domain resource location according to the corresponding CORESET symbol location set.
  • the second common control signaling is used to indicate that the current time slot belongs to the first time domain resource or the third time domain resource, according to the current time.
  • Each set of symbol locations corresponding to each time domain resource in which the slot is located performs control signaling detection.
  • the third common control signaling is detected at symbol 1, it is determined according to the third common control signaling whether the current time slot belongs to the third time domain resource. If it belongs to the third time domain resource, the control signaling is monitored according to the union of the first time domain resource and the CORESET symbol location set corresponding to the second time domain resource; if not belonging to the third time domain resource, the first A set of symbol locations is detected.
  • control signaling detection is performed at a symbol position where the next CORESET indicated by the fourth common control signaling is located.
  • control signaling is detected on symbol 1 (eg, located in the third time domain resource), but none of the first, second, third, and fourth common control signaling is detected, Equivalent to not detecting any signaling that facilitates subsequent CORESET monitoring, detecting based on the union of the set of CORESET symbol locations corresponding to the first and second time domain resources.
  • the second symbol position set ⁇ 0 ⁇ is taken as an example.
  • the second symbol position set may also have multiple symbols.
  • the detection process on the symbols is similar to the detection process of the symbol 0 in the foregoing example, and is not Let me repeat.
  • the possibility of determining the time domain resource includes: any combination of the first time domain resource, the second time domain resource, and the third time domain resource.
  • the possibility of determining the time domain resource includes: a first time domain resource, a second time domain resource or a third time domain resource.
  • the second time domain resource indicated by each of the foregoing common control signaling does not involve the first symbol position set, and does not need to be detected on the first symbol position set ⁇ 1, 3, 7 ⁇ ;
  • the standard is tested or detected using a second set of symbol positions in other embodiments of the present application.
  • the third time domain resource it is required to detect according to the union of the CORESET symbol position set corresponding to the first and second time domain resources. In this way, the overhead of detection can be saved, and the UE can reduce power consumption and increase the service life.
  • each mini-slot in the mini-slot combination transmitted on the non-complete slot follows the structure of the specified mini-slot.
  • the standard specifies the possible structure of the mini-slot, for example, the length is 2, 4 or 7, CORESET is in the first n symbol positions in each mini-slot (n is less than the mini-slot symbol length and the shorter of 3) ).
  • Other structures or details of the mini-slot may continue to be specified in the standard and will not affect the implementation of this application.
  • CORESET can be located only on a partial subband of the first n symbols.
  • the foregoing method may further include: on the sending side (the downlink network side or the uplink terminal side):
  • one or more mini-slots to be sent are prepared, that is, one or more mini-slots are generated and cached.
  • This step can be performed in parallel with the LBT process, or its time is not affected by the LBT. As long as the LBT is successful, there are enough mini-slots to be sent, saving some communication waiting time.
  • one or more mini-slots should be used to fill all the symbol positions after the successful LBT and before the start of the first complete slot, ie the first symbol to the first one. At the end of the non-complete slot. Specifically, filling in the post-alignment manner can maximize the start of the structure of the next complete slot. Therefore, embodiments of the present application provide a possible (allowed) mini-slot combination of post-alignment, that is, specifying the location of the allowed CORESET.
  • n is 1 or 2 or 3.
  • the various possible mini-slot combinations on the non-complete slot and the corresponding symbol positions of the CORESET are first introduced.
  • the white symbol in the figure indicates that the LBT has not passed at this time, the device cannot send data in the symbol; the diagonal line, the horizontal line, and the gray color respectively represent mini-slots of different lengths.
  • the gNB transmits up to one mini-slot each having a length of 2, 4, and 7 symbols in the slot, and the NR-U can support a total of seven non-slot based scheduling of different symbol starting points.
  • the NR-U adopts the above method for non-complete slot scheduling, and all the possibilities for the UE to detect the symbol location set of the DCI are listed as follows:
  • NR-U supports non-complete slot scheduling with symbol starting point of 1.
  • NR-U schedules up to 3 mini-slots of different lengths for transmission in non-complete slots:
  • the gNB sends a 2 symbol, a 4 symbol and a 7 symbol mini-slot, the UE should be in the symbol ⁇ 0,1,3,7 ⁇ or ⁇ 0,1,3,10 ⁇ or ⁇ 0,1,5,7 ⁇ or ⁇ 0,1,5,12 ⁇ or ⁇ 0,1,8,12 ⁇ or ⁇ 0,1,8,10 ⁇ for DCI detection, or at the intersection of the above symbols, ie the symbol ⁇ 0,1,3,
  • the DCI is detected on the first n symbols of 5, 7, 8, 10, 12 ⁇ (Alternative 1 in Fig. 9).
  • NR-U schedules a mini-slot for transmission in a non-complete slot:
  • the gNB sends a 2-symbol mini-slot, and the UE should perform DCI detection on the n symbols starting from the symbol ⁇ 0, 12 ⁇ (Alternative 7 in Figure 9); or,
  • the gNB sends a 4-symbol mini-slot, and the UE should perform DCI detection on the n symbols starting from the symbol ⁇ 0, 10 ⁇ (Alternative 6 in Figure 9); or,
  • the gNB sends a 7-symbol mini-slot, and the UE should perform DCI detection on the n symbols starting at the symbol ⁇ 0, 7 ⁇ (Alternative 4 in Figure 9).
  • NR-U schedules up to 2 mini-slots of different lengths for transmission in non-complete slots.
  • the gNB sends a 4-symbol and 7-symbol mini-slot, and the UE should perform DCI detection on the n symbols starting from the symbol ⁇ 0, 3, 7 ⁇ or ⁇ 0, 3, 10 ⁇ , or at the intersection of the two. That is, the DCI is detected on the n symbols starting from the symbol ⁇ 0, 3, 7, 10 ⁇ (Alternative 2 in Figure 9); or
  • the gNB sends a 2-symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot, and the UE should perform DCI detection on the n symbols starting from the symbol ⁇ 0, 5, 7 ⁇ or ⁇ 0, 5, 12 ⁇ , or at the intersection of the two. That is, the DCI is detected on the n symbols starting from the symbol ⁇ 0, 5, 7, 12 ⁇ (Alternative 3 in Figure 9); or
  • the gNB sends a 2-symbol and 4-symbol mini-slot, and the UE should perform DCI detection on the n symbols starting from the symbol ⁇ 0, 8, 10 ⁇ or ⁇ 0, 8, 12 ⁇ , or at the intersection of the two. That is, the DCI is detected on the n symbols starting from the symbol ⁇ 0, 8, 10, 12 ⁇ (Alternative 5 in Fig. 9).
  • gNB supports two mini-slots with a length of 2, 4, and 7 symbols in one slot (up to two for each length), and the gNB can be transmitted in a non-complete slot. Additional support for 3 different starting positions is shown in Figure 8.
  • the UE needs to detect the symbol location set of DCI. All possibilities are listed as follows:
  • NR-U schedules two mini-slots of the same length for transmission in a non-complete slot.
  • the gNB transmission data contains two 2-symbol mini-slots, and the UE should perform DCI detection on the n symbols starting from the symbol ⁇ 0, 10, 12 ⁇ .
  • the gNB transmission data contains two 4-symbol mini-slots, and the UE should perform DCI detection on the n symbols starting from the symbol ⁇ 0, 6, 10 ⁇ (as shown in Figure 10, Alternative 10).
  • the gNB transmission data contains two 7-symbol mini-slots, and the UE should perform DCI detection on the n symbols starting from the symbol ⁇ 0, 7 ⁇ .
  • the NR-U schedules two mini-slots of the same length and one mini-slot of different lengths for transmission in a non-complete slot.
  • the gNB sends data containing 2 2 symbols and 1 4 symbol mini-slot.
  • the UE should be at the symbol ⁇ 0,6,8,10 ⁇ or ⁇ 0,6,8,12 ⁇ or ⁇ 0,6,10,12
  • the DCI detection is performed on the first n symbols, or the DCI is detected on the n symbols starting from the intersection of the symbols, ie, the symbols ⁇ 0, 6, 8, 10, 12 ⁇ .
  • the gNB sends data containing 2 2 symbols and 1 7-symbol mini-slot.
  • the UE should be in the symbol ⁇ 0, 3, 5, 7 ⁇ or ⁇ 0, 3, 5, 12 ⁇ or ⁇ 0, 3, 10, 12 ⁇ Perform DCI detection, or detect DCI on the n symbols starting from the intersection of the above symbols, ie, the symbols ⁇ 0, 3, 5, 7, 10, 12 ⁇ .
  • the gNB sends data containing 2 4 symbols and 1 2 symbol mini-slot.
  • the UE should be at the symbol ⁇ 0,4,6,10 ⁇ or ⁇ 0,4,8,10 ⁇ or ⁇ 0,4,8,12 ⁇ Perform DCI detection, or detect DCI on the n symbols starting from the intersection of the above symbols, ie, the symbols ⁇ 0, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 ⁇ (as in Alternative 9 in Figure 8).
  • NR-U schedules 4 mini-slots for data transmission in non-complete slots.
  • gNB sends data 2 2 symbols and 2 4 symbols mini-slot, UE should be in the symbol ⁇ 0, 2, 4, 6, 10 ⁇ or ⁇ 0, 2, 4, 8, 10 ⁇ or ⁇ 0, 2, 4,8,12 ⁇ or ⁇ 0,2,6,10,12 ⁇ or ⁇ 0,2,6,8,12 ⁇ or ⁇ 0,2,6,8,10 ⁇ starting from the n symbols
  • the DCI detects, or detects the DCI at the intersection of the above symbols, ie, the symbols ⁇ 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 ⁇ (as shown in Figure 8 in Alternative 8).
  • the standard defines only one set of first symbol positions. In other words, there is only one set of possible (allowed) combinations of mini-slots. Or, the standard directly defines the type, number, and location of allowed mini-slots in the first time domain resource. It can also be understood that the CORESET of each mini-slot may be at the n symbol positions starting from which symbols in the slot in which the first time domain resource is located.
  • the standard defines a plurality of first symbol position sets. That is to say, there are multiple sets of possible (allowed) combinations of mini-slots. In each first set of symbol positions, the possible symbol positions of the respective CORESETs are not identical. For example, in the examples 1 to 5 described later, any two or more symbol position sets in the example 7.
  • the gNB may send RRC or other signaling, for explicitly or implicitly indicating to the UE, a first set of symbol locations used by the current network; so that the UE is used in the current network (configured The detection is performed at the symbol position.
  • Each first set of symbol positions may have its own index index, or may be indicated by means of a bitmap, or may be multiplexed with other information in other manners. Obviously, the above steps are not needed in the 101.a scheme.
  • a 14-bit bitmap is used to indicate that each bit corresponds to an OFDM symbol in the slot, and the value of the bit is "1", indicating that the UE needs to perform DCI blind detection at the symbol position.
  • "0” indicates that the UE does not need to perform DCI blind detection at the symbol position, and may also indicate that the "0” indicates that the UE needs to perform DCI blind detection at the symbol position, and "1" indicates that the UE is at the symbol position. No DCI blind inspection is required.
  • the NR-U when the first symbol position set is limited, if the NR-U only supports detection at position 0, only 1 bit is needed when the ⁇ 3, 7 ⁇ or ⁇ 3, 7, 10 ⁇ symbol position sets are combined. It can indicate the DCI blind check configuration that the UE should use.
  • a preferred first set of symbol locations includes, but is not limited to:
  • the information to be transmitted is also carried on the non-complete slot after the successful LBT, and the resource can be utilized efficiently.
  • the scheme of carrying the CORESET on each symbol in the non-complete slot can simplify the transmission process by specifying the symbol position that may carry the CORESET. Accordingly, the blind detection CORESET on the receiving side can be simplified. the complexity.
  • one or more time domain resources (14 symbols) of complete slot length may be included.
  • the complete 14 symbols can be either an existing slot frame structure or a combination of multiple mini-slots.
  • other CORESETs and data scheduled by the other CORESETs are also sent on the time domain resources of one or more complete slots, and the symbol positions of the other CORESETs are recorded as the second symbols. a set of locations; the second set of symbol locations being different from the first set of symbol locations.
  • NR 3GPP R15 stipulates that the number of CORESETs in a complete slot is less than or equal to 3, and CORESET can be sent at any position. Therefore, for the complete slot scheduling gNB high probability will send CORESET at symbol 0, whether other positions send CORESET, and the number of CORESET is uncertain. On the receiving side, the detection of CORESET should be performed at least at symbol 0.
  • the second symbol position set has only ⁇ 0 ⁇ .
  • the complete slot in this embodiment follows the above provisions, and there may be further optimized implementations.
  • the standard may further specify a mini-slot of mini-slots allowed in the complete slot for the unlicensed spectrum.
  • the network device side can use two 7-symbol mini-slots in a complete slot, ie it is only possible to carry CORESET on the symbol ⁇ 0, 7 ⁇ .
  • three 4 symbols and a 2 symbol mini-slot can be used in the complete slot, ie it is only possible to carry CORESET on the symbol ⁇ 0, 7 ⁇ or the symbol ⁇ 0, 2, 6, 10 ⁇ .
  • CORESET detection should be performed on at least the symbol ⁇ 0, 7 ⁇ or the symbol ⁇ 0, 2, 6, 10 ⁇ .
  • the above set of symbols is the aforementioned second set of symbol positions for the complete slot.
  • the standard may define one of the above second set of symbol positions, or two or more.
  • the network device side may also send an indication of the current second set of symbol positions, so that the UE adopts the indicated second set of symbol positions for the complete slot.
  • the method further includes: 103, after the LBT succeeds, sending, to the UE, information for indicating (identifying) the starting position of the MCOT, for example, public information.
  • the MCOT starting position is the symbol position 0 in the slot, and the foregoing embodiment includes only the second time domain resource.
  • the public information can be a common reference signal, such as DMRS or common control information, such as group common PDCCH. Steps 102 and 101 have no sequential relationship. The above public information is not carried on the aforementioned CORESET.
  • the receiving side optionally, 200, receiving information for indicating (identifying) the starting position of the MCOT.
  • control aggregation is performed on the union of the first symbol location set and the second symbol location set, and the symbol located at the start position of the MCOT or the symbol subsequent thereto Detection.
  • step 103 above may not be included, in which case the receiving side shall perform CORESET detection on the union of the first set of symbol locations and the second set of symbol locations. At the symbol position outside the union, no detection is performed, thereby ensuring timely and accurate information acquisition on the one hand, and reducing the complexity of detection and reducing the loss.
  • the above information for indicating (identifying) the starting position of the MCOT may be a sequence.
  • the terminal On the receiving side, the terminal first detects the foregoing sequence, obtains the starting position of the MCOT, and then performs detection according to the first symbol position set and the second symbol position set.
  • the 100 gNB sends uplink transmission configuration information to the UE through RRC signaling and/or PDCCH, and the UE can perform PUSCH transmission in the configured time-frequency resource.
  • the uplink transmission configuration information includes: quantity information of one or more slots (complete 14 OFDM symbols).
  • the time-frequency resource of the configuration may be less than the one or more slots configured in the time domain, that is, the UE performs uplink transmission.
  • the time-frequency resource may be less than one slot slot, or may be greater than or equal to one slot slot.
  • the UE After the LBT succeeds, the UE sends the allowed mini-slot combination in the scheduled or configured uplink time domain resource (that is, in the configured time domain resource, remaining time after the LBT succeeds);
  • the starting symbol position of each mini-slot in the mini-slot combination is recorded as the first set of symbol positions.
  • the UE may also send only one or more complete slots.
  • the method for transmitting only the complete slot is not described herein.
  • the embodiment of the present invention may also be described as:
  • DMRS Demodulation Reference Signal
  • the DMRS is located at a specified possible (allowed) bearer symbol position on. That is, the DMRS signal is carried on the OFDM symbols that are allowed to carry the DMRS in each mini-slot according to the mini-slot combination that is allowed to be transmitted.
  • the PUSCH includes one or more mini-slots or slots, and carries the DMRS signal on the first OFDM symbol of the mini-slot or slot.
  • the UE may further include one or more complete slots in the uplink transmission time slot after the LBT succeeds.
  • the duration that the UE allows the occupied channel to transmit after the LBT succeeds is configured by the gNB.
  • a time domain resource of less than 14 symbols (non-complete slot) relative to the slot boundary in the uplink transmission time slot in the above uplink transmission time slot is hereinafter referred to as a first time domain resource, one or more relative
  • the time domain resource with a length of 14 symbols (complete slot) at the slot boundary is called a second time domain resource; a non-complete slot located at the end of the uplink transmission is hereinafter referred to as a third time domain resource.
  • the above 102d includes but is not limited to:
  • mini-slots including DMRS and uplink data, are sent at the starting location.
  • the UE may also be in one or more complete slots.
  • the DMRS and the scheduled uplink data are sent on the time domain resource, and the symbol position where the DMRS is located is recorded as the second symbol position set.
  • the UE may further send the DMRS and the scheduled uplink data on a non-complete slot at the end of the transmission, where the symbol position of the DMRS is recorded as a third symbol position set.
  • each embodiment relates only to the time domain (ie, symbol symbol), and does not relate to the transmission mode in the frequency domain.
  • the DMRS and the scheduled data are located on a partial subband, such as the above DMRS and the scheduled data are transmitted on different subbands in the same time slot.
  • the symbol position of the above-mentioned standard for the first time domain resource that is allowed to carry the DMRS is hereinafter referred to as the first symbol position set.
  • the UE LBT uccessful time
  • the allowed mini-slot combination on one or more time domain resources of less than one slot slot.
  • Processing the received signal; the symbol position of the DMRS in the allowed mini-slot combination is recorded as a first set of symbol positions.
  • the method further includes: receiving, on one or more 14-symbol time domain resources, a complete slot or a combination of other mini-slots, where the DMRSs of the other mini-slots are located Recorded as a second set of symbol locations.
  • the second set of symbol positions is different from the first set of symbol positions, and of course, may be the same.
  • the method further includes: receiving a combination of mini-slots on the last (or at the end) time domain resource of less than 14 symbols in the uplink transmission time slot, where the "last" mini-slot
  • the symbol position of the combined DMRS is recorded as a third symbol position set.
  • the third symbol position set is different from the first symbol position set/second symbol position set, and of course, may be the same.
  • the gNB is the receiving side, and referring to FIG. 7d, the embodiment includes:
  • the gNB In a plurality of slots in the uplink transmission time slot configured by the gNB for the UE, if the start position to the end position of the uplink transmission after the UELBT succeeds includes (crosses) two or more slot boundaries, the gNB is in the second time.
  • the DMRS detection is performed on each symbol of the second symbol position set of the second time domain resource to determine the mini-slot combination used by the UE to transmit the PUSCH; if the UELBT succeeds after the uplink transmission
  • the gNB performs DMRS detection on each symbol of the first symbol position set or the third symbol position set of the slot to determine the mini-slot combination used by the UE to transmit the PUSCH.
  • the DMRS is sequentially detected on each of the symbols of the first symbol position set and/or the second symbol position set.
  • the gNB first attempts to detect the DMRS at symbol 0, and if no control signaling is detected, it will jump to The symbol 1 continues to detect, if the symbol 1 has not been detected, it jumps to the symbol 3 detection. If it has not been detected on the symbol 3, it jumps to the symbol 7 to detect again, and the UE does not blindly check the control signaling in other symbols to save energy.
  • the first symbol position set is not involved, and the detection is not performed on the first symbol position set ⁇ 1, 3, 7 ⁇ ; the detection may be performed according to relevant standards (for example, detecting the slot)
  • the first 1 or 2 or 3 OFDM symbols are detected, or the second set of symbol positions in other embodiments of the present application are used for detection. I will not repeat them later.
  • the first symbol position set and the second symbol position set are not involved, and the detection on the above symbol position set is not required; and the relevant standard, for example, the symbol position ⁇ 0, 2, 6 Testing is performed or detected using a third set of symbol positions in other embodiments of the present application. I will not repeat them later.
  • the second symbol position set ⁇ 0 ⁇ is taken as an example.
  • the second symbol position set may also have multiple symbols or other symbol positions.
  • the symbol 0 of the foregoing example is used. The detection process is similar and will not be described again.
  • the second symbol position set and the first symbol position set should not have a common element I.
  • the first symbol position set is not involved, and the detection is not performed on the first symbol position set ⁇ 1, 3, 7 ⁇ ; the detection may be performed according to relevant standards, or The second set of symbol locations in other embodiments of the application is detected.
  • the first symbol position set and the second symbol position set are not involved, and the first symbol position set ⁇ 1, 3, 7 ⁇ and the second symbol position set ⁇ 0 need not be needed.
  • the detection is performed on the test; the detection may be performed according to relevant standards, or the third symbol position set in other embodiments in the present application may be used for detection. In this way, the detection overhead can be saved, and the UE can reduce power consumption and extend the working time.
  • each mini-slot in the mini-slot combination sent on the non-complete slot follows the structure of the specified mini-slot.
  • the standard specifies the possible structure of the mini-slot, for example, the length is 2, 4 or 7; and the symbol position of the DMRS in each mini-slot (for example, the DMRS is always in the first symbol of the mini-slot).
  • Other structures or details of the mini-slot may continue to be specified in the standard and will not affect the implementation of this application.
  • the transmission manner of the mini-slot and the slot in the frequency domain is not limited.
  • the DMRS may be located only on a partial subband of the first symbol of the mini-slot.
  • the foregoing method may further include:
  • the UE may prepare one or more mini-slots to be sent, that is, generate and cache one or more mini-slots. This step can be performed in parallel with the LBT process, or its time is not affected by the LBT. As long as the LBT is successful, there are enough mini-slots to be sent, saving some communication waiting time.
  • one or more mini-slots should be used to fill all the symbol positions after the successful LBT and before the start of the first complete slot, ie the first symbol to the first one. At the end of the non-complete slot. Specifically, it can be filled in a post-alignment manner to maximize the start of the structure of the next complete slot. Therefore, embodiments of the present application provide a possible (allowed) mini-slot combination of post-alignment, that is, an allowed DMRS symbol position.
  • the receiving side for example, a base station such as gNB
  • detecting whether there is a DMRS on the symbol 0 in the slot for example, a base station such as gNB
  • the UE can update the DMRS carried in the mini-slot according to the status of the LBT in real time, such as the UE. If the symbol 1 detects that the LBT fails, it will update the 4-symbol mini-slot that the DMRS is ready to send at symbol 3-6. If the LBT fails to be detected at symbol 3, the UE will update the DMRS contained in the mini-slot, when the UE reaches the symbol. 10 When it is detected that the LBT is successful, the UE can send a 4-symbol mini-slot containing the DMRS that has been updated.
  • the uplink transmission time slot configured by the gNB for the UE is one or more complete slots
  • the combination of the minislot sent by the UE in the previously scheduled time slot after the LBT succeeds is referred to as a first type of mini-slot combination.
  • the white symbol in Figure 8a represents that the LBT has not passed, and the device cannot send data in the symbol; the diagonal lines, horizontal lines, and vertical lines represent mini-slots of different lengths.
  • the UE transmits up to one mini-slot each having a length of 2, 4, and 7 symbols in the slot, and the communication system can support a total of 7 non-slot based scheduling of different symbol starting points.
  • the gNB needs to detect the symbol location set of the DMRS. All possibilities are listed as follows:
  • the communication system supports non-complete slot scheduling with the symbol starting point being 1.
  • the communication system schedules up to three mini-slots of different lengths in the non-complete slot for uplink transmission:
  • the UE sends a 2 symbol, a 4 symbol and a 7 symbol mini-slot, and the gNB should be at the symbol ⁇ 1, 3, 7 ⁇ or ⁇ 1, 3, 10 ⁇ or ⁇ 1, 5, 7 ⁇ or ⁇ 1, 5 , 12 ⁇ or ⁇ 1,8,12 ⁇ or ⁇ 1,8,10 ⁇ , or perform DMRS detection on the union of the above symbols, ie the symbols ⁇ 1,3,5,7,8,10,12 ⁇ (Reference Option 1) in Figure 2.
  • the communication system supports scheduling only one mini-slot in a non-complete slot for uplink transmission:
  • the UE sends a 2-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB should perform DMRS detection on the symbol ⁇ 12 ⁇ (option 7 in Figure 8a); or,
  • the UE sends a 4-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB should perform DMRS detection on the symbol ⁇ 10 ⁇ (option 6 in Figure 8a); or,
  • the UE sends a 7-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB should perform DMRS detection on the symbol ⁇ 7 ⁇ (option 4 in Figure 8a).
  • the communication system supports scheduling up to two mini-slots of different lengths in a non-complete slot for uplink transmission.
  • the UE sends a 4-symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB should perform DMRS detection on the symbol ⁇ 3, 7 ⁇ or ⁇ 3, 10 ⁇ , or in the union of the two, ie, the symbol ⁇ 3, 7, 10 ⁇ Detect DMRS (option 2 in Figure 8a); or
  • the UE sends a 2-symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB should perform DMRS detection on the symbol ⁇ 5, 7 ⁇ or ⁇ 5, 12 ⁇ , or the union of the above two, ie the symbol ⁇ 5, 7, 12 ⁇ Detect DMRS (option 3 in Figure 8a); or
  • the UE sends a 2 symbol and a 4 symbol mini-slot.
  • the gNB should perform DMRS detection on the symbol ⁇ 8, 10 ⁇ or ⁇ 8, 12 ⁇ , or the union of the above two symbols, ie, the symbol ⁇ 8, 10, 12 ⁇ Detect DMRS (option 5 in Figure 8a).
  • the UE can support the UE.
  • the type, number and location of mini-slots are limited. For example, when a DMRS of a mini-slot with a duration of 2 symbols is generated according to the position of symbol 1, it can only be transmitted at symbol 1-2.
  • the UE only prepares one mini-slot of lengths of 2, 4, and 7 symbols that are transmitted at 1, 3, and 7 symbols, the DMRS generation corresponding to the mini-slot is related to the symbol positions 1, 3, and 7. .
  • the uplink transmission time slot configured by the gNB to the UE is one or more complete slots
  • the combination of the minislot sent by the UE in the previously scheduled time slot after the LBT succeeds is referred to as a second type of mini-slot combination.
  • the possible transmission manner of the UE is as follows:
  • the communication system supports non-complete slot scheduling with the symbol starting point being 1.
  • the communication system schedules up to three mini-slots of different lengths for transmission in the non-complete slot:
  • the UE sends a 2 symbol, a 4 symbol and a 7 symbol mini-slot, and the gNB should perform DMRS detection on the symbol ⁇ 1, 3, 7 ⁇ (option 1 in Figure 8a).
  • the communication system supports scheduling one mini-slot for transmission in a non-complete slot:
  • the UE sends a 7-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB should perform DMRS detection on symbol ⁇ 7 ⁇ (option 4 in Figure 8a).
  • the communication system supports scheduling up to 2 mini-slots of different lengths for transmission in non-complete slots.
  • the UE sends a 4-symbol and 7-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB should perform DMRS detection on the symbol ⁇ 3, 7 ⁇ (option 2 in Figure 2).
  • the number of mini-slots selected by the UE and the length of the mini-slot may be specified by the standard or configured by the gNB.
  • 2, 4, 7 symbol mini-slot preset transmission positions prepared by the UE are different, for example, when the UE first transmits a 4-symbol mini-slot and then transmits a 2-symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot, the above DMRS symbol detection position Corresponding changes will occur, so I won't go into details here.
  • the UE can update the DMRS carried in the mini-slot according to the state of the LBT in real time.
  • the gNB configures the uplink transmission time slot of the UE to be larger than one 14-symbol slot, and after the last complete time slot, there is also a non-complete slot resource whose length is L and L is less than 14 symbols; or, the gNB configures the UE
  • the uplink transmission time slot only contains a non-complete slot resource of length L and L less than 14 symbols (and the resource time domain start position is the symbol position 0 of the complete slot resource).
  • the UE transmits the minislot combination in the scheduled L slot, which is called the third type mini-slot combination.
  • the UE transmits up to one mini-slot of length 2, 4, and 7 symbols in the slot, and the communication system can support a total of seven non-slot based schedulings for different durations.
  • the communication system uses the following method for non-complete slot scheduling.
  • the gNB needs to detect the symbol location set of the DMRS. All possibilities are listed below:
  • the UE may directly send a non-complete slot with a duration of 13 symbols, and its DMRS is located at symbol 0.
  • the gNB detects the DMRS on symbol 0, it can know that the UE sends a non-complete slot with a duration of 13 symbols.
  • the UE can also send a combination of 2+4+7 symbol mini-slot, and the gNB can pass the detection symbol 2,6. Whether there are additional DMRSs to distinguish between the above two cases;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before symbol 2, the UE may start sending a 4-symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot starting from symbol 1 or symbol 2.
  • the gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from the symbol 0, possibly detecting the DMRS on the symbol ⁇ K, K+4 ⁇ or ⁇ K, K+7 ⁇ , and K is the starting symbol for the mini-slot transmission of the UE. position;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT listening. If the LBT passes before the symbol 4, the UE may start sending a 2 symbol and a 7 symbol mini-slot starting from symbol 3 or symbol 4.
  • the gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 3, possibly detecting DMRS on the symbol ⁇ K, K+2 ⁇ or ⁇ K, K+7 ⁇ , and K is the starting symbol for mini-slot transmission of the UE. position;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 6, the UE may send a 7-symbol mini-slot from symbol 5 or symbol 6. gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 5, possibly detecting DMRS on symbol ⁇ 5 ⁇ or ⁇ 6 ⁇ ;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 7, the UE may send a 2 symbol and a 4 symbol mini-slot starting from the symbol 7. gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 7, and gNB can detect DMRS on symbol ⁇ 7, 9 ⁇ or ⁇ 7, 11 ⁇ ;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 9, the UE may start sending a 4-symbol mini-slot from the symbol 8 or the symbol 9. gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 8, possibly detecting DMRS on symbol ⁇ 8 ⁇ or ⁇ 9 ⁇ ;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 11, the UE may send a 2-symbol mini-slot starting from the symbol 10 or the symbol 11, and the gNB will start from the symbol 10. DMRS detection is performed on each symbol, and DMRS may be detected on the symbol ⁇ 10 ⁇ or ⁇ 11 ⁇ .
  • the gNB will first detect the DMRS at symbol 0. If the detection is successful, the UE sends a non-complete slot with a length of 13 symbols. If DMRS is detected in symbol 1 or symbol 2, it can be determined according to the symbol position of the subsequent DMRS whether the UE sends a 4-symbol mini-slot+7 symbol mini-slot or a 7-symbol mini-slot+4 symbol mini-slot.
  • the order of sending different mini-slots may also be fixed by the standard, for example, according to the order of sending mini-slots, such as a large mini-slot first, a small mini-slot, or Small mini-slots are issued first, and large mini-slots are issued.
  • the mini-slot with small initial length can further utilize time-frequency resources and improve the utilization of time-frequency resources.
  • the transmission order of the mini-slot is fixed, no additional DMRS detection is required on the receiving side. If DMRS is detected at symbol 3 or symbol 4, the UE transmits a 2-symbol mini-slot+7 symbol mini-slot.
  • the UE sends a 7-symbol mini-slot. If DMRS is detected at symbol 7, the UE transmits a 2-symbol mini-slot+4 symbol mini-slot. If DMRS is detected at symbol 8 or symbol 9, the UE sends a 4-symbol mini-slot. If DMRS is detected at symbol 10 or symbol 11, the UE transmits a 2-symbol mini-slot.
  • the UE may directly send a non-complete slot with a duration of L symbol, and its DMRS is located at symbol 0.
  • the gNB detects the DMRS on symbol 0, and knows that the UE sends a non-complete slot with a duration of L symbol;
  • the gNB detects the DMRS in the above symbol set of the third time domain resource to determine the mini-slot or mini-slot combination actually sent by the UE.
  • the UE cannot update the DMRS carried in the mini-slot according to the state of the LBT in real time.
  • the gNB configures the uplink transmission time slot of the UE to be larger than one 14-symbol slot, and after the last complete time slot, there is also a non-complete slot resource whose length is L and L is less than 14 symbols; or, the gNB configures the UE
  • the uplink transmission time slot only contains a non-complete slot resource of length L and L less than 14 symbols (and the resource time domain start position is the symbol position 0 of the complete slot resource).
  • the UE transmits the minislot combination in the scheduled L slot, which is called the fourth type mini-slot combination.
  • the UE may be configured to transmit a maximum of one, two, four, and seven symbols of the mini-slot in the slot, and the UE first sends the mini-slot with the length of 2, 4, and 7 symbols in a certain order. And generate DMRS according to the symbol position where each mini-slot is located.
  • the UE uses the above method to perform non-complete slot scheduling.
  • the gNB needs to detect the symbol location set of the DMRS. All possibilities are listed below:
  • the UE configures to send the mini-slot in the form of a 2-symbol mini-slot, a 4-symbol mini-slot, and a 7-symbol mini-slot.
  • the UE may directly send a non-complete slot with a duration of 13 symbols, and its DMRS is located at symbol 0.
  • the gNB detects the DMRS on symbol 0 to know that the UE sends a non-complete slot with a duration of 13 symbols or a mini-slot combination of 2+4+7 symbols. gNB can distinguish between the two by DMRS detection at symbol 2, symbol 6 position;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 2, the UE will send a 4-symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot starting from the symbol 2. gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 0, possibly detecting DMRS on symbol ⁇ 2, 6 ⁇ ;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 6, the UE will send a 7-symbol mini-slot from the symbol 6.
  • the gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 2, possibly detecting DMRS on symbol ⁇ 6 ⁇ ;
  • the gNB will first detect the DMRS at symbol 0. If the detection is successful, the UE sends a combination of a non-complete slot or a 2+4+7 symbol mini-slot of length 13; if detected at symbol 2 To the DMRS, the UE sends a 4-symbol mini-slot+7 symbol mini-slot; if the DMRS is detected at symbol 6, the UE sends a 7-symbol mini-slot.
  • the above is the transmission mechanism and gNB detection method when the mini-slot configured by the UE is 2+4+7.
  • the UE may also use other mini-slot transmission configurations, which may be given by the standard or configured by the gNB to the UE.
  • the UE transmits up to one mini-slot of length 2, 4, and 7 symbols in the slot, and the UE first transmits the mini-slots of length 2, 4, and 7 symbols in a certain order, and according to each mini.
  • the symbol position where -slot is located generates DMRS.
  • the UE can configure a 4-symbol mini-slot and a 7-symbol mini-slot in the non-complete slot.
  • all possible mini-slot transmission methods of the UE are as follows:
  • the UE may directly send a non-complete slot with a duration of L symbol, and its DMRS is located at symbol 0.
  • the gNB detects the DMRS on symbol 0 to know that the UE sends a non-complete slot with a duration of L symbol;
  • the gNB determines the symbol location set detection for DMRS detection according to the third time domain resource persistent symbol number, thereby determining the mini-slot or mini-slot combination actually sent by the UE. It should be noted that the gNB will determine the possible mini-slot configurations (such as the number of mini-slots and their durations) and the corresponding DMRS detection symbol location set according to the value of the previous configuration L, in the same manner as described above. , will not repeat them here. In addition, the mini-slot combination configured by the UE may be specifically configured by the gNB or may be given by a standard.
  • the gNB can be configured with a 4-signal and a 7-symbol mini-slot, or it can be given by the standard. The UE will only send the 4-symbol mini first. -slot, then send 7-symbol mini-slot.
  • the UE can update the DMRS carried in the mini-slot according to the state of the LBT in real time.
  • the gNB configures the uplink transmission time slot of the UE to be larger than one 14-symbol slot, and before the first complete time slot, there is also a non-complete slot resource whose length is L and L is less than 14 symbols; or, gNB is given to the UE.
  • the configured uplink transmission time slot only includes one non-complete slot resource whose length is L and L is less than 14 symbols (and the resource time domain end position is the symbol position 13 of the complete slot resource).
  • the UE transmits the minislot combination in the scheduled L slot, which is called the fifth type mini-slot combination.
  • the UE transmits up to one mini-slot of length 2, 4, and 7 symbols in the slot, and the communication system can support a total of seven non-slot based schedulings for different durations.
  • the communication system uses the following method for non-complete slot scheduling.
  • the gNB needs to detect the symbol location set of the DMRS. All possibilities are listed below:
  • the UE When the UE passes the LBT before the symbol 1, the UE can directly transmit a non-complete slot with a duration of 13 symbols, and its DMRS is located at symbol 1.
  • the gNB detects the DMRS on symbol 0, it can know that the UE sends a non-complete slot with a duration of 13 symbols.
  • the UE can also send a combination of 2+4+7 symbol mini-slot, and the gNB can pass the detection symbol 3, 7. Whether there are additional DMRSs to distinguish between the above two cases;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before symbol 3, the UE may send a 4-symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot starting from symbol 2 or symbol 3. gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 1, possibly DMRS on symbol ⁇ K, K+4 ⁇ or ⁇ K, K+7 ⁇ , K is the starting symbol for mini-slot transmission of UE position;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 5, the UE may start sending a 2 symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot from the symbol 4 or the symbol 5.
  • the gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 4, possibly detecting DMRS on the symbol ⁇ K, K+2 ⁇ or ⁇ K, K+7 ⁇ , and K is the starting symbol for mini-slot transmission of the UE. position;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT listening. If the LBT passes before the symbol 7, the UE may send a 7-symbol mini-slot from symbol 6 or symbol 7. gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 5, possibly detecting DMRS on symbol ⁇ 6 ⁇ or ⁇ 7 ⁇ ;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 8, the UE may send a 2 symbol and a 4 symbol mini-slot starting from the symbol 8.
  • the gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from the symbol 8, and the gNB can detect the DMRS on the symbol ⁇ 8, 10 ⁇ or ⁇ 8, 12 ⁇ ;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 10, the UE may start sending a 4-symbol mini-slot from the symbol 9 or the symbol 10.
  • the gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 9, and may detect DMRS on symbol ⁇ 9 ⁇ or ⁇ 10 ⁇ ;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT listening. If the LBT passes before the symbol 12, the UE may start sending a 2-symbol mini-slot from the symbol 11 or the symbol 12, and the gNB will start from the symbol 11 DMRS detection is performed on each symbol, and DMRS may be detected on the symbol ⁇ 11 ⁇ or ⁇ 12 ⁇ .
  • the gNB will first detect the DMRS at symbol 1, and if the detection is successful, the UE sends a non-complete slot with a length of 13 symbols. If the DMRS is detected in the symbol 2 or the symbol 3, it can be determined according to the symbol position of the subsequent DMRS whether the UE transmits the 4-symbol mini-slot+7 symbol mini-slot or the 7-symbol mini-slot+4 symbol mini-slot.
  • the order of sending different mini-slots may also be fixed by the standard, for example, according to the order of sending mini-slots, such as a large mini-slot first, a small mini-slot, or Small mini-slots are issued first, and large mini-slots are issued.
  • the mini-slot with small initial length can further utilize time-frequency resources and improve the utilization of time-frequency resources.
  • the transmission order of the mini-slot is fixed, no additional DMRS detection is required on the receiving side. If DMRS is detected at symbol 4 or symbol 5, the UE transmits a 2-symbol mini-slot+7 symbol mini-slot.
  • DMRS Downlink Reference Signal
  • the UE If DMRS is detected at symbol 6 or symbol 7, the UE sends a 7-symbol mini-slot. If DMRS is detected at symbol 8, the UE transmits a 2-symbol mini-slot+4 symbol mini-slot. If DMRS is detected at symbol 9 or symbol 10, the UE transmits a 4-symbol mini-slot. If DMRS is detected at symbol 11 or symbol 12, the UE transmits a 2-symbol mini-slot.
  • the UE When the UE passes the LBT before the symbol (14-L), the UE can directly transmit a non-complete slot with a duration of L symbol, and its DMRS is located at the symbol (14-L).
  • the gNB detects the DMRS on the symbol (14-L), and knows that the UE sends a non-complete slot with a duration of L symbol;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M, 14-L ⁇ M, 11 ⁇ L ⁇ 13), the UE will send a 4 Symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot, gNB can be in the symbol ⁇ M,M+4 ⁇ or ⁇ M,M+7 ⁇ , or in the union of the above symbols, ie the symbol ⁇ M,M+4,M+7 ⁇ Perform DMRS detection on;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M, 14-L ⁇ M, 9 ⁇ L ⁇ 13), the UE will send a 2 symbol and a 7
  • the symbol's mini-slot, gNB can be DMRS detected on the symbol ⁇ M, M+2 ⁇ or ⁇ M, M+7 ⁇ , or on the union of the above symbols, ie the symbol ⁇ M, M+2, M+7 ⁇ ;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M, 7 ⁇ L ⁇ 13), the UE will send a 7-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB can be in the symbol.
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M, 14-L ⁇ M, 6 ⁇ L ⁇ 13), the UE will send a 2 Symbol and a 4-symbol mini-slot, gNB can be in the symbol ⁇ M,M+2 ⁇ or ⁇ M,M+4 ⁇ , or in the union of the above symbols, ie the symbol ⁇ M,M+2,M+4 ⁇ Perform DMRS detection on;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M, 14-L ⁇ M, 4 ⁇ L ⁇ 13), the UE will send a 4 The symbol's mini-slot, gNB can perform DMRS detection on the symbol ⁇ M ⁇ ;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M, 14-L ⁇ M, 2 ⁇ L ⁇ 13), the UE will send a 2 The symbol's mini-slot, gNB can perform DMRS detection on the symbol ⁇ M ⁇ ;
  • the UE cannot update the DMRS carried in the mini-slot according to the state of the LBT in real time.
  • the gNB configures the uplink transmission time slot of the UE to be larger than one 14-symbol slot, and before the first complete time slot, there is also a non-complete slot resource whose length is L and L is less than 14 symbols; or, gNB is given to the UE.
  • the configured uplink transmission time slot only includes one non-complete slot resource whose length is L and L is less than 14 symbols (and the resource time domain end position is the symbol position 13 of the complete slot resource).
  • the UE transmits the minislot combination in the scheduled L slot, which is called the sixth type mini-slot combination.
  • the UE may be configured to transmit a maximum of one, two, four, and seven symbols of the mini-slot in the slot, and the UE first sends the mini-slot with the length of 2, 4, and 7 symbols in a certain order. And generate DMRS according to the symbol position where each mini-slot is located.
  • the UE uses the above method to perform non-complete slot scheduling.
  • the gNB needs to detect the symbol location set of the DMRS. All possibilities are listed below:
  • the UE configures to send the mini-slot in the form of a 2-symbol mini-slot, a 4-symbol mini-slot, and a 7-symbol mini-slot.
  • the UE When the UE passes the LBT before the symbol 1, the UE can directly transmit a non-complete slot with a duration of 13 symbols, and its DMRS is located at symbol 1.
  • the gNB detects the DMRS on symbol 1 to know that the UE sends a non-complete slot with a duration of 13 symbols or a mini-slot combination of 2+4+7 symbols. gNB can distinguish between the two by DMRS detection at symbol 3, symbol 7 position;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 3, the UE will send a 4-symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot starting from the symbol 3.
  • the gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 1, and may detect DMRS on symbol ⁇ 3, 7 ⁇ ;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 7, the UE will send a 7-symbol mini-slot from the symbol 7.
  • the gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 3, possibly detecting DMRS on symbol ⁇ 7 ⁇ ;
  • the gNB will first detect the DMRS at symbol 1, and if the detection is successful, the UE sends a combination of a non-complete slot or a 2+4+7 symbol mini-slot of length 13; if detected at symbol 3 To the DMRS, the UE sends a 4-symbol mini-slot+7 symbol mini-slot; if the DMRS is detected at symbol 7, the UE sends a 7-symbol mini-slot.
  • the above is the transmission mechanism and gNB detection method when the mini-slot configured by the UE is 2+4+7.
  • the UE may also use other mini-slot transmission configurations, which may be given by the standard or configured by the gNB to the UE.
  • the UE transmits up to one mini-slot of length 2, 4, and 7 symbols in the slot, and the UE first transmits the mini-slots of length 2, 4, and 7 symbols in a certain order, and according to each mini.
  • the symbol position where -slot is located generates DMRS.
  • the UE can configure a 4-symbol mini-slot and a 7-symbol mini-slot in the non-complete slot.
  • all possible mini-slot transmission methods of the UE are as follows:
  • the UE may directly send a non-complete slot with a duration of L symbol, and its DMRS is located at symbol 2.
  • the gNB detects the DMRS on symbol 2 to know that the UE sends a non-complete slot with a duration of L symbol;
  • the UE If the LBT fails when the UE is at symbol 2, the UE continues to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M, 14-L ⁇ M, 11 ⁇ L ⁇ 13), the UE is configured in advance and sends a 4 symbols and a 7-symbol mini-slot, gNB can be performed on the symbol ⁇ M, M+4 ⁇ or ⁇ M, M+7 ⁇ or on the union of the above symbols ⁇ M, M+4, M+7 ⁇ DMRS detection;
  • the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M, 14-L ⁇ M, 9 ⁇ L ⁇ 13), the UE will send a 7-symbol mini- Slot, gNB will perform DMRS detection on the symbol ⁇ M ⁇ ;
  • the gNB determines the symbol location set detection for DMRS detection according to the third time domain resource persistent symbol number, thereby determining the mini-slot or mini-slot combination actually sent by the UE. It should be noted that the gNB will determine the possible mini-slot configurations (such as the number of mini-slots and their durations) and the corresponding DMRS detection symbol location set according to the value of the previous configuration L, in the same manner as described above. , will not repeat them here. In addition, the mini-slot combination configured by the UE may be specifically configured by the gNB or may be given by a standard.
  • the gNB can be configured with a 4-signal and a 7-symbol mini-slot. It can also be given by the standard. The UE will only send the 4-symbol mini first. -slot, then send 7-symbol mini-slot.
  • the first one or more (x) symbols in the complete/non-complete slot of the uplink transmission configured by the gNB to the UE may be used to perform the LBT, and the first/second/third/fourth/fifth/first The DMRS detection symbol positions in the six types of minislot combinations are shifted backward by x symbols, and will not be described herein.
  • the UE determines the mini-slot to be sent according to the result of the LBT and the uplink time slot information configured by the gNB for the UE and the allowed mini-slot combination specified by the standard (for example, specifying the first set of symbol positions). Slot combination.
  • the DMRS carried by the minislot/slot may be updated in real time according to the LBT result, and the UE may transmit more than one mini-slot/slot PUSCH, optionally, the UE may The DMRS is sent only on the first mini-slot/slot of one or more mini-slots/slots that are allowed to be sent. This can further save system overhead.
  • the gNB may not be able to judge the mini-slot/slot order sent by the UE according to the DMRS, but the order of transmission of the mini-slot/slot may be configured by the gNB (as indicated in the RMSI/OSI) or by the standard.
  • the gNB shall perform DMRS detection according to the UE capability according to the fifth/sixth type minislot combination (ie, the foregoing first symbol position set or a subset thereof). To determine the mini-slot/slot combination that the UE actually sends;
  • the gNB shall be combined according to the UE capability according to the third/fourth type minislot (ie, the foregoing second symbol position set and/or the third symbol position set). Perform DMRS detection to determine the mini-slot/slot combination actually sent by the UE;
  • the gNB shall be combined according to the UE capability according to the fifth/sixth type minislot (ie, the foregoing first symbol position set or a subset thereof).
  • the DMRS detection is performed on the complete slot according to the first/second type minislot combination (the aforementioned first symbol position set and/or the second symbol position set) to determine the mini-slot actually sent by the UE. /slot combination;
  • the gNB When the gNB configures the uplink resource of the UE to include one initial non-complete slot plus a number of complete slots plus one non-complete slot at the end, the gNB shall be in accordance with the UE capability according to the fifth/sixth type minislot combination (ie, the foregoing a set of symbol positions or a subset thereof) in the initial non-complete slot, according to the first/second type minislot combination (the aforementioned first symbol position set and / or the second symbol position set) on the complete slot, according to the above
  • the third/fourth type minislot combination ie, the foregoing second symbol position set and/or the third symbol position set) performs DMRS detection on the last non-complete slot to determine the mini-slot/slot combination actually sent by the UE;
  • the gNB shall combine the first/second type minislot according to the UE capability (the aforementioned first symbol position set and/or the second symbol) Position set) on the complete slot, according to the third/fourth type minislot combination (ie, the foregoing second symbol position set and/or the third symbol position set), perform DMRS detection on the last non-complete slot to determine the actual transmission of the UE.
  • Mini-slot/slot combination ie, the foregoing second symbol position set and/or the third symbol position set
  • the gNB shall perform the complete slot on the complete slot according to the UE capability according to the first/second type minislot combination (the foregoing first symbol position set and/or the second symbol position set).
  • DMRS detection to determine the mini-slot/slot combination actually sent by the UE;
  • the gNB shall be according to the UE capability according to the fifth/sixth type minislot combination (ie, the foregoing first symbol position set or a subset thereof) in the initial non-complete slot, performing DMRS detection on the last non-complete slot according to the third/fourth type minislot combination (ie, the foregoing second symbol position set and/or the third symbol position set) to determine the UE The actual mini-slot/slot combination sent.
  • the fifth/sixth type minislot combination ie, the foregoing first symbol position set or a subset thereof
  • the third/fourth type minislot combination ie, the foregoing second symbol position set and/or the third symbol position set
  • the first set of symbol locations includes but is not limited to:
  • the receiving side can detect whether there is a DMRS on only 3 symbols, and these 3 symbols are 1, 3, and 7.
  • the PUSCH may only carry the DMRS on the symbol ⁇ 3, 7 ⁇ .
  • the PUSCH may only carry DMRS on the symbol ⁇ 5, 7 ⁇ .
  • the PUSCH may only carry the DMRS on the symbol ⁇ 8, 10 ⁇ .
  • the information to be transmitted is also carried on the non-complete slot after the successful LBT, and the resource can be utilized efficiently.
  • the transmission process can be simplified by specifying the symbol position that may carry the DMRS, and accordingly, the blind detection PUSCH of the receiving side can be simplified. the complexity.
  • the uplink transmission time slot after the successful LBT may include one or more time domain resources (14 symbols) of the full slot length.
  • the complete 14 symbols can be either an existing slot frame structure or a combination of multiple mini-slots.
  • the other DMRS and the scheduled PUSCH are also sent on the time domain resources of the one or more complete slots, and the symbol position where the DMRS is located is recorded as the second symbol position set.
  • the second set of symbol locations is different from the first set of symbol locations.
  • scheduling UE may send DMRS at symbol 0, whether DMRS is sent at other locations, and the number of DMRSs is uncertain.
  • the detection of the DMRS should be performed at least at symbol 2.
  • the second symbol position set has only ⁇ 0 ⁇ .
  • the complete slot in this embodiment follows the above provisions, and there may be further optimized implementations.
  • the standard may further specify a mini-slot of mini-slots allowed in the complete slot for the unlicensed spectrum.
  • the UE side can use two 7-symbol mini-slots in the complete slot, ie it is only possible to carry the DMRS on the symbol ⁇ 0, 7 ⁇ .
  • three 4 symbols and a 2 symbol mini-slot can be used in the complete slot, ie it is only possible to carry the DMRS on the symbol ⁇ 0, 7 ⁇ or the symbol ⁇ 0, 2, 6, 10 ⁇ .
  • DMRS detection should be performed on at least the symbol ⁇ 0, 7 ⁇ or the symbol ⁇ 0, 2, 6, 10 ⁇ .
  • the above set of symbols is the aforementioned second set of symbol positions for the complete slot.
  • one of the above second symbol position sets or two or more types may be defined.
  • the network device side may also send an indication of the current second set of symbol positions, so that the UE adopts the indicated second set of symbol positions for the complete slot.
  • the standard may define an allowable mini-slot combination (which may be one or more), and the standard may further define the order in which the respective mini-slots are allowed to be transmitted, which may be one or more.
  • a sequence of sending mini-slots is agreed. For example, according to the order of sending mini-slots, for example, a mini-slot with a large length is sent first, a mini-slot with a small length is issued, or a mini-slot with a small length is issued first, and a mini-slot with a large length is issued. .
  • the mini-slot with small initial length can further utilize time-frequency resources and improve the utilization of time-frequency resources.
  • the fixed mini-slot sequence further simplifies the detection process on the receiving side.
  • the permissible The mini-slot combination defines the order of allowed mini-slots, thereby improving communication efficiency and simplifying reception-side processing.
  • the standard defines only a first set of symbol locations (if any), a second set of symbol locations (if any), or a set of third symbol locations (if any). In other words, there is only one set of possible (allowed) combinations of mini-slots. Or, the standard directly defines the type, number, and location of allowed mini-slots in the first time domain resource. It can also be understood that, for the uplink, it is defined at which symbol position in the slot in which the first time domain resource is located in the DMRS of each mini-slot. For the downlink, it is defined at which symbol position in the slot in which the control signalling may be located in the slot in which the first time domain resource is located.
  • the standard defines a plurality of first symbol position sets. That is to say, there are multiple sets of possible (allowed) combinations of mini-slots.
  • the possible symbol positions of the respective DMRSs are not identical. For example, a set of any two or more symbol positions in Examples 1 to 7 described later.
  • the gNB may send RRC or other signaling, for explicitly or implicitly indicating to the UE, a first set of symbol locations used by the current network; so that the UE is used in the current network (configured ) Uplink transmission at the symbol position.
  • Each first set of symbol positions may have its own index index, or may be indicated by means of a bitmap, or may be multiplexed with other information in other manners.
  • a 14-bit bitmap is used to indicate that each bit corresponds to an OFDM symbol in the slot, and the value of the bit is "1", indicating that the UE needs to perform DMRS blind detection at the symbol position.
  • "0” indicates that the UE does not need to perform DMRS blind detection at the symbol position, and may also indicate that the "0” is required to perform DMRS blind detection at the symbol position, and "1" indicates that the UE is at the symbol position. No DMRS blind inspection is required.
  • the communication system when the first symbol position set is limited, if the communication system only supports detection at position 0, when ⁇ 3, 7 ⁇ or ⁇ 3, 7, 10 ⁇ two symbol position sets, only 1 bit is needed.
  • the DMRS blind check configuration that the UE should use can be indicated.
  • only LBT transfer communication is not allowed
  • the allowed location that can carry DMRS (uplink) or control signaling (downlink) can be the second OFDM symbol on each mini slot or slot (or possibly the 2-3th or 2-4th OFDM symbol) .
  • the foregoing first symbol position set, the second symbol position set or the third symbol position set will correspondingly remove the OFDM symbol position that does not allow communication, and adjust the OFDM symbol position carrying DMRS (uplink) or control signaling (downlink). .
  • the foregoing first symbol position set ⁇ 1, 3, 7 ⁇ and the two symbol position set ⁇ 0 ⁇ are taken as an example. If the LBT scheme can only be performed by using the first OFDM symbol, the first symbol position set is ⁇ 3, 7 ⁇ , the second symbol position set is ⁇ 1 ⁇ . Other examples are not described here.
  • the embodiment of the present invention further provides a wireless communication system, which may be the wireless communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the wireless communication system 10 shown in FIG. 10, which may include: a network device.
  • the terminal may be the terminal in the foregoing embodiment, and the network device may be the network device in the foregoing embodiment.
  • the terminal may be the terminal 300 shown in FIG. 2, and the network device may be the network device 400 shown in FIG.
  • the terminal may also be the terminal 400 shown in FIG. 10, and the network device shown may also be the network device 500 shown in FIG.
  • the network and the terminal reference may be made to the foregoing embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
  • the network device processor 405 is configured to control the transmitter 407 to transmit in an unlicensed band and/or a licensed band and control the receiver 409 to receive in an unlicensed band and/or a licensed band.
  • Transmitter 407 is used to support the network device to perform the process of transmitting data and/or signaling.
  • Receiver 409 is for supporting a network device to perform a process of receiving data and/or signaling.
  • the memory 405 is used to store program codes and data of the network device.
  • the transmitter 407 can be used to perform the above methods 101a-102a, 101b-102b, 100, 103; 101c-102c, 101d-102d, and the like.
  • the transmitter 407 can be used to perform the above methods 101a-102a, 101b-102b, 100, 103; 101c-102c, 101d-102d, and the like.
  • the terminal processor 304 is configured to invoke an instruction stored in the memory 312 to control the transmitter 306 to transmit in an unlicensed band and/or a licensed band and control the receiver 308 in an unlicensed band. And/or licensed bands for reception.
  • Transmitter 306 is used to support the terminal in performing the process of transmitting data and/or signaling.
  • Receiver 308 is used to support the process by which the terminal performs reception of data and/or signaling.
  • the memory 312 is used to store program codes and data of the terminal.
  • the receiver 308 can be used in the methods 201a-202a, 201b-202b, 200; 201c-202c, 201d-202d, and the like.
  • the receiver 308 can be used in the methods 201a-202a, 201b-202b, 200; 201c-202c, 201d-202d, and the like.
  • the transmitter 306 can be configured to send uplink data on the monitored idle frequency domain resources.
  • each functional module in the embodiment can be divided differently without affecting the implementation of the product.
  • the LBT module can be divided to implement the LBT function of FIG. 4A and/or 4B, and the data preparation module can be divided to generate a cache mini-slot; different transmission modules can be divided for CORESET and data transmission respectively.
  • Receive module for CORESET and data reception In the product, the above modules are likely to be integrated in hardware and software, such as processors or integrated circuits.
  • the steps of the method or algorithm described in connection with the disclosure of the embodiments of the present invention may be implemented in a hardware manner, or may be implemented by a processor executing software instructions.
  • the software instructions may be composed of corresponding software modules, which may be stored in RAM, flash memory, ROM, Erasable Programmable ROM (EPROM), and electrically erasable programmable read only memory (Electrically EPROM).
  • EEPROM electrically erasable programmable read only memory
  • registers hard disk, removable hard disk, compact disk read only (CD-ROM) or any other form of storage medium known in the art.
  • An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor to enable the processor to read information from, and write information to, the storage medium.
  • the storage medium can also be an integral part of the processor.
  • the processor and the storage medium can be located in an ASIC. Additionally, the ASIC can be located in a transceiver or relay device.
  • the processor and the storage medium may also exist as discrete components in the radio access network device or the
  • the functions described in the embodiments of the present invention may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof.
  • the functions may be stored in a computer readable medium or transmitted as one or more instructions or code on a computer readable medium.
  • Computer readable media includes both computer storage media and communication media including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one location to another.
  • a storage medium may be any available media that can be accessed by a general purpose or special purpose computer.

Abstract

A signal transmission method, related apparatus and system, the method comprising: performing LBT; after LBT succeeds, sending, on one or more time domain resources smaller than a time slot, an allowed mini-slot combination.

Description

信号传输方法、装置Signal transmission method and device
本申请要求于2018年5月11日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为201810451022.8、发明名称为“信号传输方法、装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,以及要求于2018年7月19日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为201810797873.8、发明名称为“信号传输方法、装置”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese Patent Application submitted by the State Intellectual Property Office of China, Application No. 201810451022.8, and the invention name "Signal Transmission Method, Device" on May 11, 2018, and the request is submitted on July 19, 2018. The priority of the Chinese Patent Application No. 201810797873.8, entitled "Signal Transmission Method, Apparatus", the entire contents of which is hereby incorporated by reference.
技术领域Technical field
本申请涉及无线通信技术领域,尤其涉及一种信号传输方法及装置。The present application relates to the field of wireless communications technologies, and in particular, to a signal transmission method and apparatus.
背景技术Background technique
工作在非授权频段(unlicensed band)的设备不需授权即可自行检测信道是否空闲并接入信道进行工作。为了保证和其他在非授权频段工作的设备共存和公平性,3GPP的R13版本中,规定了采用先听后说(LBT:Listen-Before-Talk)的信道竞争接入机制。Devices operating in unlicensed bands can detect whether the channel is idle and access the channel for operation without authorization. In order to ensure coexistence and fairness with other devices operating in unlicensed bands, the R13 version of 3GPP specifies a channel contention access mechanism using LBT (Listen-Before-Talk).
工作于非授权频段的eNB可以随时开始LBT,由于其它系统产生的干扰出现和持续时间的不确定性,LBT可能在任意时刻结束。如何高效的利用LBT成功后的时域资源,是本申请关注的问题。An eNB operating in an unlicensed band may start the LBT at any time, and the LBT may end at any time due to the occurrence of interference and duration uncertainty of other systems. How to effectively utilize the time domain resources after successful LBT is a concern of this application.
发明内容Summary of the invention
本申请提供了一种信号传输方法,可以应用于上行或者下行,包括进行LBT;在LBT成功后,在一个或者多个小于1个时隙slot的时域资源上,发送允许的mini-slot的组合;所述允许的mini-slot组合中的各个mini-slot的起始的符号位置,记为第一符号位置集合。较优的,所述各个mini-slot中包括承载控制信令的控制资源集CORESET,所述控制信令包括:第一公共控制信令,所述第一公共控制信令用于指示MCOT的配置信息;或者其他控制信令。The present application provides a signal transmission method, which can be applied to uplink or downlink, including performing LBT; after the LBT is successful, transmitting the allowed mini-slot on one or more time domain resources of less than one slot slot. Combination; the starting symbol position of each mini-slot in the allowed mini-slot combination, denoted as the first set of symbol positions. Preferably, each of the mini-slots includes a control resource set CORESET that carries control signaling, where the control signaling includes: a first common control signaling, where the first common control signaling is used to indicate a configuration of the MCOT. Information; or other control signaling.
较优的,所述第一符号位置集合是下述符号位置集合中的一个或者多个:{1,3,7},{3,7,10},{3,7},{7,10},{5,7,12},{5,7},{7,12}。一般的,在所述LBT成功后,还可能在一个或者多个14个符号的时域资源上发送:完整的slot或者其它的mini-slot的组合,所述其它的mini-slot的组合的各个mini-slot的起始符号位置记为第二符号位置集合;较优的,所述第二符号位置集合与所述第一符号位置集合不同。但是,所述第二符号位置集合与所述第一符号位置集合也有可能不同。较优的,所述方法还包括:发送最大信道占用时间MCOT的起始位置的指示。可以高效的利用通信资源并减少接收侧的处理复杂度。Preferably, the first set of symbol positions is one or more of the following set of symbol positions: {1, 3, 7}, {3, 7, 10}, {3, 7}, {7, 10 },{5,7,12},{5,7},{7,12}. Generally, after the LBT succeeds, it is also possible to send on one or more 14-symbol time domain resources: a complete slot or a combination of other mini-slots, each of the other mini-slot combinations The starting symbol position of the mini-slot is recorded as a second set of symbol positions; preferably, the second set of symbol positions is different from the first set of symbol positions. However, the second set of symbol positions may also differ from the first set of symbol positions. Preferably, the method further comprises: transmitting an indication of a starting position of the maximum channel occupation time MCOT. The communication resources can be utilized efficiently and the processing complexity on the receiving side can be reduced.
其他方面,提供了可以执行上述方法的装置,另外,相应的,还提供了接收侧的发送方法和装置。In other aspects, an apparatus that can perform the above method is provided, and in addition, a transmitting method and apparatus on the receiving side are also provided.
另一方面,仅涉及下行的方法,在网络侧,包括:在LBT成功后,在一个或者多个小于1个时隙slot的时域资源上,发送控制资源集CORESET;所述CORESET位于规定的允许承载CORESET的符号位置上;(101)按照所述CORESET发送所述CORESET调度的数 据(102)。可以高效的利用通信资源并减少接收侧的处理复杂度。On the other hand, the downlink only method, on the network side, includes: after the LBT succeeds, transmitting a control resource set CORESET on one or more time domain resources of less than one slot slot; the CORESET is located in a specified The symbol position of the CORESET is allowed to be transmitted; (101) the CORESET scheduled data is transmitted (102) according to the CORESET. The communication resources can be utilized efficiently and the processing complexity on the receiving side can be reduced.
其中,较优的,所述规定的允许承载CORESET的符号位置记为第一符号位置集合,是下述符号位置集合中的一个或者多个:{1,3,7},{3,7,10},{3,7},{7,10},{5,7,12},{5,7},{7,12}。所述第一符号位置集合为多个时,所述方法还包括:发送当前使用的第一符号位置集合的指示。另外,所述LBT成功后,还可以在一个或者多个完整slot的时域资源上发送发送其它CORESET和被所述其它CORESET调度的数据,所述其它CORESET所在的符号位置记为第二符号位置集合;较优的,所述第二符号位置集合与所述第一符号位置集合不同。更进一步的,所述第二符号位置集合为标准规定的符号位置集合。另外,所述方法还可以包括:发送用于MCOT的起始位置的指示。Preferably, the specified symbol position that allows the CORESET to be carried is recorded as a first set of symbol positions, which is one or more of the following set of symbol positions: {1, 3, 7}, {3, 7, 10}, {3, 7}, {7, 10}, {5, 7, 12}, {5, 7}, {7, 12}. When the first set of symbol locations is plural, the method further includes: transmitting an indication of the currently used first set of symbol locations. In addition, after the LBT succeeds, the other CORESETs and the data scheduled by the other CORESETs may be sent and sent on the time domain resources of the one or more complete slots, where the symbol positions of the other CORESETs are recorded as the second symbol positions. Preferably, the second set of symbol positions is different from the first set of symbol positions. Further, the second set of symbol positions is a standard set of symbol positions. Additionally, the method can also include transmitting an indication of a starting location for the MCOT.
另一方方面,本申请还提供了相应的终端侧的处理方法,在规定的允许承载CORESET的符号位置上进行CORESET的检测,在其他位置上可以不进行检测,从而节省资源和省电。On the other hand, the present application also provides a corresponding processing method on the terminal side, which performs CORESET detection at a specified symbol position that allows CORESET to be carried, and may not perform detection at other locations, thereby saving resources and saving power.
本申请相应的提供了一种网络侧的装置,包括设备或者单板等装置,以及,终端侧装置,包括终端,芯片,或者其他可能的装置。Correspondingly, the present application provides a device on the network side, including devices such as devices or boards, and terminal devices, including terminals, chips, or other possible devices.
其他方面,提供了一种通信系统,所述通信系统包括:网络设备和终端,其中:所述网络设备可以是前述的网络设备。所述终端前述的终端。In other aspects, a communication system is provided, the communication system comprising: a network device and a terminal, wherein: the network device can be the aforementioned network device. The terminal mentioned above by the terminal.
其他方面,提供了一种计算机可读存储介质,所述可读存储介质上存储有指令,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述描述的信号传输方法。In other aspects, a computer readable storage medium is provided having instructions stored thereon that, when executed on a computer, cause the computer to perform the signal transmission methods described above.
其他方面,,提供了一种包含指令的计算机程序产品,当其在计算机上运行时,使得计算机执行上述的信号传输方法。In other aspects, a computer program product comprising instructions for causing a computer to perform the signal transmission method described above is provided when it is run on a computer.
附图说明DRAWINGS
为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例或背景技术中的技术方案,下面将对本申请实施例或背景技术中所需要使用的附图进行说明。In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application or the background art, the drawings to be used in the embodiments of the present application or the background art will be described below.
图1是本申请提供的一种无线通信系统的架构示意图;1 is a schematic structural diagram of a wireless communication system provided by the present application;
图2是本申请的一个实施例提供的终端设备的硬件架构示意图;2 is a schematic diagram of a hardware architecture of a terminal device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图3是本申请的一个实施例提供的网络设备的硬件架构示意图;3 is a schematic diagram of a hardware architecture of a network device according to an embodiment of the present application;
图4A-4B是本申请涉及的Type A/Type B多载波LBT机制的示意图;4A-4B are schematic diagrams of a Type A/Type B multi-carrier LBT mechanism involved in the present application;
图5本申请涉及的符合LTE中时隙帧结构示意图;FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a structure of a slot frame conforming to LTE according to the present application;
图6本申请涉及的符合NR中微时隙帧结构示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a structure corresponding to a micro-slot frame in an NR according to the present application;
图7a,7b,7c和7d本申请涉及的方法流程简单示意图;7a, 7b, 7c and 7d are schematic diagrams showing the flow of the method involved in the present application;
图8,8a是本申请提供的NR-U通信系统支持的非完整slot调度对应的可能起点示例一;8, 8a is a possible starting point example 1 corresponding to the non-complete slot scheduling supported by the NR-U communication system provided by the present application;
图9是本申请提供的NR-U通信系统支持的非完整slot调度对应的可能起点示例二;9 is a second example of a possible starting point corresponding to a non-complete slot scheduling supported by the NR-U communication system provided by the present application;
图10是本申请的提供的无线通信系统,终端和网络设备的功能框图。10 is a functional block diagram of a wireless communication system, a terminal, and a network device provided by the present application.
具体实施方式detailed description
本申请的实施方式部分使用的术语仅用于对本申请的具体实施例进行解释,而非旨在限定本请。The terms used in the embodiments of the present application are only used to explain the specific embodiments of the present application, and are not intended to limit the present application.
参考图1,图1示出了本申请涉及的无线通信系统100。无线通信系统100可以工作在授权频段,也可以工作在非授权频段。可以理解的,非授权频段的使用可以提高无线通信系统100的系统容量。如图1所示,无线通信系统100包括:一个或多个网络设备(Base Station)101,例如网络设备(如gNB)、eNodeB或者WLAN接入点,一个或多个终端(Terminal)103,以及核心网115。其中:Referring to Figure 1, there is shown a wireless communication system 100 to which the present application relates. The wireless communication system 100 can operate in a licensed band or in an unlicensed band. As can be appreciated, the use of unlicensed frequency bands can increase the system capacity of the wireless communication system 100. As shown in FIG. 1, the wireless communication system 100 includes: one or more base stations 101, such as network devices (such as gNBs), eNodeBs or WLAN access points, one or more terminals (Terminal) 103, and Core network 115. among them:
网络设备101可用于在网络设备控制器(如基站控制器)(未示出)的控制下与终端103通信。在一些实施例中,所述网络设备控制器可以是核心网115的一部分,也可以集成到网络设备101中。 Network device 101 can be used to communicate with terminal 103 under the control of a network device controller (e.g., a base station controller) (not shown). In some embodiments, the network device controller may be part of the core network 115 or may be integrated into the network device 101.
网络设备101可用于通过回程(blackhaul)接口(如S1接口)113向核心网115传输控制信息(control information)或者用户数据(user data)。The network device 101 can be used to transmit control information or user data to the core network 115 via a blackhaul interface (e.g., S1 interface) 113.
网络设备101可以通过一个或多个天线来和终端103进行无线通信。各个网络设备101均可以为各自对应的覆盖范围107提供通信覆盖。接入点对应的覆盖范围107可以被划分为多个扇区(sector),其中,一个扇区对应一部分覆盖范围(未示出)。 Network device 101 can communicate wirelessly with terminal 103 via one or more antennas. Each network device 101 can provide communication coverage for each respective coverage area 107. The coverage area 107 corresponding to the access point may be divided into a plurality of sectors, wherein one sector corresponds to a part of coverage (not shown).
网络设备101与网络设备101之间也可以通过回程(blackhaul)链接211,直接地或者间接地,相互通信。这里,回程链接111可以是有线通信连接,也可以是无线通信连接。The network device 101 and the network device 101 can also communicate with each other directly or indirectly via a blackhaul link 211. Here, the backhaul link 111 may be a wired communication connection or a wireless communication connection.
在本申请的一些实施例中,网络设备101可以包括:基站收发台(Base Transceiver Station),无线收发器,一个基本服务集(Basic Service Set,BSS),一个扩展服务集(Extended Service Set,ESS),NodeB,eNodeB,网络设备(如gNB)等等。无线通信系统100可以包括几种不同类型的网络设备101,例如宏基站(macro base station)、微基站(micro base station)等。网络设备101可以应用不同的无线技术,例如小区无线接入技术,或者WLAN无线接入技术。In some embodiments of the present application, the network device 101 may include: a base transceiver station (Base Transceiver Station), a wireless transceiver, a basic service set (BSS), and an extended service set (Extended Service Set, ESS). ), NodeB, eNodeB, network device (such as gNB) and so on. The wireless communication system 100 can include several different types of network devices 101, such as a macro base station, a micro base station, and the like. The network device 101 can apply different wireless technologies, such as a cell radio access technology, or a WLAN radio access technology.
终端103可以分布在整个无线通信系统100中,可以是静止的,也可以是移动的。在本申请的一些实施例中,终端103可以包括:移动设备,移动台(mobile station),移动单元(mobile unit),无线单元,远程单元,用户代理,移动客户端等等。本申请中,终端也可以理解为终端设备。 Terminals 103 may be distributed throughout wireless communication system 100, either stationary or mobile. In some embodiments of the present application, the terminal 103 may include: a mobile device, a mobile station, a mobile unit, a wireless unit, a remote unit, a user agent, a mobile client, and the like. In this application, a terminal can also be understood as a terminal device.
本申请中,无线通信系统100可以是能够工作在非授权频段的LTE通信系统,例如LTE-U系统,也可以是能够工作在非授权频段的新空口通信系统,例如NRU系统,还可以是未来工作在非授权频段的其他通信系统。In the present application, the wireless communication system 100 may be an LTE communication system capable of operating in an unlicensed frequency band, such as an LTE-U system, or a new air interface communication system capable of operating in an unlicensed frequency band, such as an NRU system, or may be a future. Other communication systems operating in unlicensed bands.
另外,无线通信系统100还可以包括WiFi网络。Additionally, the wireless communication system 100 can also include a WiFi network.
参考图2,图2示出了本申请的一些实施例提供的终端300。如图2所示,终端300可包括:输入输出模块(包括音频输入输出模块318、按键输入模块316以及显示器320等)、用户接口302、一个或多个终端处理器304、发射器306、接收器308、耦合器310、天线314以及存储器312。这些部件可通过总线或者其他方式连接,图2以通过总线连接为例。其中:Referring to Figure 2, there is shown a terminal 300 provided by some embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 2, the terminal 300 may include: an input and output module (including an audio input and output module 318, a key input module 316, and a display 320, etc.), a user interface 302, one or more terminal processors 304, a transmitter 306, and a receiving The 308, the coupler 310, the antenna 314, and the memory 312. These components can be connected by bus or other means, and FIG. 2 is exemplified by a bus connection. among them:
通信接口301可用于终端300与其他通信设备,例如基站,进行通信。具体的,所述基站可以是图3所示的网络设备400。通信接口301是指终端处理器304与收发系统(由 发射器306和接收器308构成)之间的接口,例如LTE中的X1接口。具体实现中,通信接口301可包括:全球移动通信系统(Global System for Mobile Communication,GSM)(2G)通信接口、宽带码分多址(Wideband Code Division Multiple Access,WCDMA)(3G)通信接口,以及长期演进(Long Term Evolution,LTE)(4G)通信接口等等中的一种或几种,也可以是4.5G、5G或者未来新空口的通信接口。不限于无线通信接口,终端300还可以配置有有线的通信接口301,例如局域接入网(Local Access Network,LAN)接口。 Communication interface 301 can be used by terminal 300 to communicate with other communication devices, such as base stations. Specifically, the base station may be the network device 400 shown in FIG. Communication interface 301 refers to an interface between terminal processor 304 and a transceiver system (consisting of transmitter 306 and receiver 308), such as the X1 interface in LTE. In a specific implementation, the communication interface 301 may include: a Global System for Mobile Communication (GSM) (2G) communication interface, a Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) (3G) communication interface, and One or more of the Long Term Evolution (LTE) (4G) communication interfaces and the like may also be a communication interface of 4.5G, 5G or a future new air interface. Not limited to the wireless communication interface, the terminal 300 may be configured with a wired communication interface 301, such as a Local Access Network (LAN) interface.
天线314可用于将传输线中的电磁能转换成自由空间中的电磁波,或者将自由空间中的电磁波转换成传输线中的电磁能。耦合器310用于将天线314接收到的移动通信信号分成多路,分配给多个的接收器308。The antenna 314 can be used to convert electromagnetic energy in a transmission line into electromagnetic waves in free space, or to convert electromagnetic waves in free space into electromagnetic energy in a transmission line. The coupler 310 is configured to divide the mobile communication signal received by the antenna 314 into multiple channels and distribute it to a plurality of receivers 308.
发射器306可用于对终端处理器304输出的信号进行发射处理,例如将该信号调制在授权频段的信号,或者调制在非授权频段的信号。 Transmitter 306 can be used to transmit signals to signals output by terminal processor 304, such as modulating the signal in a licensed band or modulating a signal in an unlicensed band.
接收器308可用于对天线314接收的移动通信信号进行接收处理。例如,接收器308可以解调已被调制在非授权频段上的接收信号,也可以解调调制在授权频段上的接收信号。 Receiver 308 can be used to perform reception processing on the mobile communication signals received by antenna 314. For example, the receiver 308 can demodulate a received signal that has been modulated on an unlicensed band, and can also demodulate a received signal that is modulated on a licensed band.
在本申请的一些实施例中,发射器306和接收器308可看作一个无线调制解调器。在终端300中,发射器306和接收器308的数量均可以是一个或者多个。In some embodiments of the present application, transmitter 306 and receiver 308 can be viewed as a wireless modem. In the terminal 300, the number of the transmitter 306 and the receiver 308 may each be one or more.
除了图2所示的发射器306和接收器308,终端300还可包括其他通信部件,例如GPS模块、蓝牙(Bluetooth)模块、无线高保真(Wireless Fidelity,Wi-Fi)模块等。不限于上述表述的无线通信信号,终端300还可以支持其他无线通信信号,例如卫星信号、短波信号等等。不限于无线通信,终端300还可以配置有有线网络接口(如LAN接口)来支持有线通信。In addition to the transmitter 306 and the receiver 308 shown in FIG. 2, the terminal 300 may also include other communication components such as a GPS module, a Bluetooth module, a Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) module, and the like. Not limited to the above-described wireless communication signals, the terminal 300 can also support other wireless communication signals such as satellite signals, short-wave signals, and the like. Not limited to wireless communication, the terminal 300 may be configured with a wired network interface (such as a LAN interface) to support wired communication.
所述输入输出模块可用于实现终端300和用户/外部环境之间的交互,可主要包括音频输入输出模块318、按键输入模块316以及显示器320等。具体实现中,所述输入输出模块还可包括:摄像头、触摸屏以及传感器等等。其中,所述输入输出模块均通过用户接口302与终端处理器304进行通信。The input and output module can be used to implement interaction between the terminal 300 and the user/external environment, and can mainly include an audio input and output module 318, a key input module 316, a display 320, and the like. In a specific implementation, the input and output module may further include: a camera, a touch screen, a sensor, and the like. The input and output modules communicate with the terminal processor 304 through the user interface 302.
存储器312与终端处理器304耦合,用于存储各种软件程序和/或多组指令。具体实现中,存储器312可包括高速随机存取的存储器,并且也可包括非易失性存储器,例如一个或多个磁盘存储设备、闪存设备或其他非易失性固态存储设备。存储器312可以存储操作系统(下述简称系统),例如ANDROID,IOS,WINDOWS,或者LINUX等嵌入式操作系统。存储器312还可以存储网络通信程序,该网络通信程序可用于与一个或多个附加设备,一个或多个终端设备,一个或多个网络设备进行通信。存储器312还可以存储用户接口程序,该用户接口程序可以通过图形化的操作界面将应用程序的内容形象逼真的显示出来,并通过菜单、对话框以及按键等输入控件接收用户对应用程序的控制操作。 Memory 312 is coupled to terminal processor 304 for storing various software programs and/or sets of instructions. In particular implementations, memory 312 can include high speed random access memory, and can also include non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. The memory 312 can store an operating system (hereinafter referred to as a system) such as an embedded operating system such as ANDROID, IOS, WINDOWS, or LINUX. The memory 312 can also store a network communication program that can be used to communicate with one or more additional devices, one or more terminal devices, one or more network devices. The memory 312 can also store a user interface program, which can realistically display the content image of the application through a graphical operation interface, and receive user control operations on the application through input controls such as menus, dialog boxes, and keys. .
在本申请的一些实施例中,存储器312可用于存储本申请的一个或多个实施例提供的信号传输方法在终端300侧的实现程序。关于本申请的一个或多个实施例提供的信号传输方法的实现,请参考后续实施例。In some embodiments of the present application, the memory 312 can be used to store an implementation of the signal transmission method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application on the terminal 300 side. For implementation of the signal transmission method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application, please refer to the subsequent embodiments.
终端处理器304可用于读取和执行计算机可读指令。具体的,终端处理器304可用于调用存储于存储器312中的程序,例如本申请的一个或多个实施例提供的信号传输方法在终端300侧的实现程序,并执行该程序包含的指令。 Terminal processor 304 can be used to read and execute computer readable instructions. Specifically, the terminal processor 304 can be used to invoke a program stored in the memory 312, such as the implementation of the signal transmission method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application on the terminal 300 side, and execute the instructions contained in the program.
可以理解的,终端300可以是图1示出的无线通信系统100中的终端103,可实施为移动设备,移动台(mobile station),移动单元(mobile unit),无线单元,远程单元,用户代理,移动客户端等等。It can be understood that the terminal 300 can be the terminal 103 in the wireless communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1, and can be implemented as a mobile device, a mobile station, a mobile unit, a wireless unit, a remote unit, and a user agent. , mobile client and more.
需要说明的,图2所示的终端300仅仅是本申请的一种实现方式,实际应用中,终端300还可以包括更多或更少的部件,这里不作限制。It should be noted that the terminal 300 shown in FIG. 2 is only one implementation of the present application. In an actual application, the terminal 300 may further include more or fewer components, which are not limited herein.
参考图3,图3示出了本申请的一些实施例提供的网络设备400。如图3所示,网络设备400可包括:通信接口403、一个或多个基站处理器401、发射器407、接收器409、耦合器411、天线413和存储器405。这些部件可通过总线或者其他方式连接,图3以通过总线连接为例。其中:Referring to FIG. 3, FIG. 3 illustrates a network device 400 provided by some embodiments of the present application. As shown in FIG. 3, network device 400 can include a communication interface 403, one or more base station processors 401, a transmitter 407, a receiver 409, a coupler 411, an antenna 413, and a memory 405. These components can be connected by bus or other means, and FIG. 3 is exemplified by a bus connection. among them:
通信接口403可用于网络设备400与其他通信设备,例如终端设备或其他基站,进行通信。具体的,所述终端设备可以是图2所示的终端300。通信接口301是指基站处理器401与收发系统(由发射器407和接收器409构成)之间的接口,例如LTE中的S1接口。具体实现中,通信接口403可包括:全球移动通信系统(GSM)(2G)通信接口、宽带码分多址(WCDMA)(3G)通信接口,以及长期演进(LTE)(4G)通信接口等等中的一种或几种,也可以是4.5G、5G或者未来新空口的通信接口。不限于无线通信接口,网络设备400还可以配置有有线的通信接口403来支持有线通信,例如一个网络设备400与其他网络设备400之间的回程链接可以是有线通信连接。 Communication interface 403 can be used by network device 400 to communicate with other communication devices, such as terminal devices or other base stations. Specifically, the terminal device may be the terminal 300 shown in FIG. 2. Communication interface 301 refers to an interface between base station processor 401 and a transceiver system (consisting of transmitter 407 and receiver 409), such as the S1 interface in LTE. In a specific implementation, the communication interface 403 may include: a Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) (2G) communication interface, a Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) (3G) communication interface, and a Long Term Evolution (LTE) (4G) communication interface, etc. One or several of them may also be a communication interface of 4.5G, 5G or a new air interface in the future. Not limited to the wireless communication interface, the network device 400 may also be configured with a wired communication interface 403 to support wired communication. For example, the backhaul link between one network device 400 and other network devices 400 may be a wired communication connection.
天线413可用于将传输线中的电磁能转换成自由空间中的电磁波,或者将自由空间中的电磁波转换成传输线中的电磁能。耦合器411可用于将移动通信号分成多路,分配给多个的接收器409。The antenna 413 can be used to convert electromagnetic energy in a transmission line into electromagnetic waves in free space, or to convert electromagnetic waves in free space into electromagnetic energy in a transmission line. The coupler 411 can be used to divide the mobile pass signal into multiple channels and distribute it to a plurality of receivers 409.
发射器407可用于对基站处理器401输出的信号进行发射处理,例如将该信号调制在授权频段的信号,或者调制在非授权频段的信号。The transmitter 407 can be used to transmit a signal output by the base station processor 401, such as modulating the signal in a licensed band or modulating a signal in an unlicensed band.
接收器409可用于对天线413接收的移动通信信号进行接收处理。例如,接收器409可以解调已被调制在非授权频段上的接收信号,也可以解调调制在授权频段上的接收信号。The receiver 409 can be used to perform reception processing on the mobile communication signal received by the antenna 413. For example, the receiver 409 can demodulate a received signal that has been modulated on an unlicensed band, and can also demodulate a received signal that is modulated on a licensed band.
在本申请的一些实施例中,发射器407和接收器409可看作一个无线调制解调器。在网络设备400中,发射器407和接收器409的数量均可以是一个或者多个。In some embodiments of the present application, transmitter 407 and receiver 409 can be viewed as a wireless modem. In the network device 400, the number of the transmitter 407 and the receiver 409 may each be one or more.
存储器405与基站处理器401耦合,用于存储各种软件程序和/或多组指令。具体实现中,存储器405可包括高速随机存取的存储器,并且也可包括非易失性存储器,例如一个或多个磁盘存储设备、闪存设备或其他非易失性固态存储设备。存储器405可以存储操作系统(下述简称系统),例如uCOS、VxWorks、RTLinux等嵌入式操作系统。存储器405还可以存储网络通信程序,该网络通信程序可用于与一个或多个附加设备,一个或多个终端设备,一个或多个网络设备进行通信。 Memory 405 is coupled to base station processor 401 for storing various software programs and/or sets of instructions. In particular implementations, memory 405 can include high speed random access memory, and can also include non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other non-volatile solid state storage devices. The memory 405 can store an operating system (hereinafter referred to as a system) such as an embedded operating system such as uCOS, VxWorks, or RTLinux. The memory 405 can also store a network communication program that can be used to communicate with one or more additional devices, one or more terminal devices, one or more network devices.
基站处理器401可用于进行无线信道管理、实施呼叫和通信链路的建立和拆除,并 为本控制区内用户设备的过区切换进行控制等。具体实现中,基站处理器401可包括:管理/通信模块(Administration Module/Communication Module,AM/CM)(用于话路交换和信息交换的中心)、基本模块(Basic Module,BM)(用于完成呼叫处理、信令处理、无线资源管理、无线链路的管理和电路维护功能)、码变换及子复用单元(Transcoder and SubMultiplexer,TCSM)(用于完成复用解复用及码变换功能)等等。The base station processor 401 can be used to perform wireless channel management, implement call and communication link establishment and teardown, and control the handoff of user equipment in the control area. In a specific implementation, the base station processor 401 may include: an Administration Module/Communication Module (AM/CM) (a center for voice exchange and information exchange), and a Basic Module (BM) (for Complete call processing, signaling processing, radio resource management, radio link management and circuit maintenance functions), code conversion and sub-multiplexer (TCSM) (for multiplexing demultiplexing and code conversion functions) )and many more.
本申请中,基站处理器401可用于读取和执行计算机可读指令。具体的,基站处理器401可用于调用存储于存储器405中的程序,例如本申请的一个或多个实施例提供的信号传输方法在网络设备400侧的实现程序,并执行该程序包含的指令。In the present application, base station processor 401 can be used to read and execute computer readable instructions. Specifically, the base station processor 401 can be used to invoke a program stored in the memory 405, for example, the implementation of the signal transmission method provided by one or more embodiments of the present application on the network device 400 side, and execute the instructions included in the program.
可以理解的,网络设备400可以是图1示出的无线通信系统100中的网络设备101,可实施为基站收发台,无线收发器,一个基本服务集(BSS),一个扩展服务集(ESS),NodeB,eNodeB等等。网络设备400可以实施为几种不同类型的基站,例如宏基站、微基站等。网络设备400可以应用不同的无线技术,例如小区无线接入技术,或者WLAN无线接入技术。It can be understood that the network device 400 can be the network device 101 in the wireless communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1, and can be implemented as a base transceiver station, a wireless transceiver, a basic service set (BSS), and an extended service set (ESS). , NodeB, eNodeB, etc. Network device 400 can be implemented as several different types of base stations, such as macro base stations, micro base stations, and the like. Network device 400 can apply different wireless technologies, such as cell radio access technology, or WLAN radio access technology.
需要说明的,图3所示的网络设备400仅仅是本申请的一种实现方式,实际应用中,网络设备400还可以包括更多或更少的部件,这里不作限制。It should be noted that the network device 400 shown in FIG. 3 is only one implementation of the present application. In actual applications, the network device 400 may further include more or fewer components, which are not limited herein.
为了保证和其他在非授权频段工作的设备共存,NRU系统采用LBT的信道竞争接入机制,并在3GPP的R13版本中对LBT的流程和参数进行了规定。图4A-4B示出了两种类型的LBT侦听机制。In order to ensure coexistence with other devices operating in unlicensed bands, the NRU system adopts the LBT channel contention access mechanism, and the LBT process and parameters are specified in the R13 version of 3GPP. Figures 4A-4B illustrate two types of LBT listening mechanisms.
如图4A所示,类型A(Type A)LBT设备可以在多个成员载波(component carrier,CC)上进行独立的退避,当在某个载波上退避完成后延迟传输来等待其他仍在退避的成员载波。当所有进行LBT的载波都完成退避后,该设备需要做额外的one-shot CCA(25us clear channel assessment)来保证所有载波空闲;如果所有载波空闲,则eNB在空闲载波上同时进行传输。As shown in FIG. 4A, the Type A LBT device can perform independent backoff on multiple component carriers (CCs). When the backoff is completed on a certain carrier, the transmission is delayed to wait for other still backoffs. Member carrier. After all the LBT-enabled carriers are backed off, the device needs to perform an additional one-shot CCA (25us clear channel assessment) to ensure that all carriers are idle; if all carriers are idle, the eNB transmits simultaneously on the idle carriers.
如图4B所示,类型B(Type B)LBT设备仅在某个选取的成员载波上进行退避,当退避结束时在其他成员载波上进行one-shot CCA(25us clear channel assessment)的回看,如果成员载波为空闲,则进行数据传输;如果该成员载波不空闲,则此次无法在该成员载波上进行数据传输。As shown in FIG. 4B, the Type B LBT device performs backoff only on a selected component carrier, and performs one-shot CCA (25us clear channel assessment) on other component carriers when the backoff ends. If the component carrier is idle, data transmission is performed; if the component carrier is not idle, data transmission cannot be performed on the component carrier at this time.
如图4A-4B所示,进行LBT的设备可以是LTE LAA,WiFi,NRU或是其它工作于非授权(unlicensed)频段的通信设备。图中设备进行LBT收到的干扰来自于WiFi系统,在实际场景中,进行LBT的设备受到的干扰也可以来自于LTE LAA,NRU或是其它工作于unlicensed频段的通信系统,本申请对此不作限制。As shown in FIGS. 4A-4B, the device performing LBT may be LTE LAA, WiFi, NRU or other communication device operating in an unlicensed frequency band. The interference received by the device in the LBT is from the WiFi system. In the actual scenario, the interference received by the LBT device may also come from the LTE LAA, NRU or other communication system operating in the unlicensed frequency band. limit.
不限于图4A-4B所示,NR U系统采用的LBT侦听机制还可以发生变化,不影响本申请的实施。Not limited to that shown in Figures 4A-4B, the LBT listening mechanism employed by the NR U system may also vary without affecting the implementation of the present application.
本申请中应用到的帧结构,可以是LTE或者其各演进版本的帧结构。例如,如图5所示,LTE规定的一种典型帧结构,在一个调度时隙(slot)中,包括14个OFDM符号(后文简称符号),前1,2或者3个符号承载控制信息(DCI),后11,12或者-13个符号承载数据。在新空口NR中,为了提高系统调度的灵活性,引入了微调度时隙(mini-slot), 其长度可以是2,4,或者7个OFDM符号。如图6所示的例子中,1个slot中包含3个4符号长的mini-slot和1个2符号长的mini-slot。当然,还可以是其他的mini-slot的组合。在每个mini-slot中,从第1个符号其前n个符号上承载本mini-slot的控制资源集(CORESET),用于承载该mini-slot的调度信息(DCI)。具体的,n为自然数,小于mini-slot中的符号个数。较优的,n不超过3。The frame structure applied in this application may be a frame structure of LTE or its evolved versions. For example, as shown in FIG. 5, a typical frame structure specified by LTE includes 14 OFDM symbols (hereinafter referred to as symbols) in a scheduling slot, and the first 1, 2 or 3 symbols carry control information. (DCI), after 11, 12 or -13 symbols carry data. In the new air interface NR, in order to improve the flexibility of system scheduling, a micro-slot is introduced, which may be 2, 4, or 7 OFDM symbols in length. In the example shown in FIG. 6, one slot contains three 4-sign long mini-slots and one 2-symbol long mini-slot. Of course, it can also be a combination of other mini-slots. In each mini-slot, the control resource set (CORESET) of the mini-slot is carried from the first n symbols of the first symbol, and is used to carry the scheduling information (DCI) of the mini-slot. Specifically, n is a natural number and is smaller than the number of symbols in the mini-slot. Preferably, n does not exceed 3.
基于前述无线通信系统100、终端300以及网络设备400分别对应的实施例,本申请提供了一种信号传输方法,提供了LBT成功后时域资源上发送控制资源集和相应的数据的技术方案,并提供了在接收侧进行检测的技术方案。Based on the foregoing embodiments of the wireless communication system 100, the terminal 300, and the network device 400 respectively, the present application provides a signal transmission method, which provides a technical solution for transmitting a control resource set and corresponding data on a time domain resource after successful LBT. A technical solution for detecting on the receiving side is provided.
参考图7a,在发送侧,可以是上行也可以是下行,主要包括:Referring to FIG. 7a, on the transmitting side, it may be uplink or downlink, and mainly includes:
101a进行LBT。具体的,可以是网络设备,也可以是用户设备UE101a performs LBT. Specifically, it may be a network device or a user equipment UE.
102a在LBT成功后,在一个或者多个小于1个时隙slot的时域资源上,发送允许的mini-slot的组合;所述允许的mini-slot组合中的各个mini-slot的起始的符号位置,记为第一符号位置集合。102a, after the success of the LBT, transmitting a combination of allowed mini-slots on one or more time domain resources of less than one slot slot; the start of each mini-slot in the allowed mini-slot combination The symbol position is recorded as the first symbol position set.
一般的,在所述LBT成功后,还可能在一个或者多个14个符号的时域资源上发送:完整的slot或者其它的mini-slot的组合,所述其它的mini-slot的组合的各个mini-slot的起始符号位置记为第二符号位置集合;较优的,所述第二符号位置集合与所述第一符号位置集合不同。可选的,UE配置的上行传输资源的最后一个非完整slot的持续时间小于14个符号,该非完整slot中包括多个mini-slot,该各个mini-slot起始的符号位置记为第三符号位置集合。Generally, after the LBT succeeds, it is also possible to send on one or more 14-symbol time domain resources: a complete slot or a combination of other mini-slots, each of the other mini-slot combinations The starting symbol position of the mini-slot is recorded as a second set of symbol positions; preferably, the second set of symbol positions is different from the first set of symbol positions. Optionally, the duration of the last non-complete slot of the uplink transmission resource configured by the UE is less than 14 symbols, and the non-complete slot includes multiple mini-slots, and the symbol position of each mini-slot is recorded as the third. A collection of symbol locations.
具体的,根据后文描述的mini-slot结构,对于下行的传输,本发明实施方式也可以描述为:Specifically, according to the mini-slot structure described later, for downlink transmission, the embodiment of the present invention may also be described as:
101b、配置控制资源集(CORESET);其中,对于小于1个时隙slot的时域资源,所述控制资源集(CORESET)位于规定的可能(允许)承载CORESET的符号位置上。可以由标准规定允许承载CORESET的符号位置。101b. A configuration control resource set (CORESET); wherein, for a time domain resource of less than 1 slot slot, the control resource set (CORESET) is located at a specified symbol position that may (allow) bearer CORESET. The symbol position that allows CORESET can be specified by the standard.
102b、在LBT成功后,发送承载于所述CORESET的一个或者多个控制信令。102b. After the LBT succeeds, send one or more control signalings carried by the CORESET.
与完整的slot相比,上述小于1个时隙的时域资源可以称为非完整slot(non-slot)。在LBT成功后的最大信道占用时间(Maximum Channel Occupancy Time,简称MCOT)中,还可以包括一个或者多个完整slot。MCOT为最大信道占用时间,即设备LBT成功后运行占用信道进行传输的最长持续时间。为描述方便,上述MCOT中的位于起始位置的相对于slot边界的一个小于14个符号(非完整slot)的时域资源,后续称为第一时域资源,一个或者多个相对于slot边界的长度为14个符号的(完整slot)的时域资源称为第二时域资源;位于MCOT中的位于末尾位置一个的非完整slot后续称为第三时域资源。Compared with the complete slot, the above-mentioned time domain resources of less than 1 time slot may be referred to as non-slots. In the Maximum Channel Occupancy Time (MCOT) after the successful LBT, one or more complete slots may also be included. The MCOT is the maximum channel occupation time, that is, the maximum duration of time after the device LBT succeeds in running the occupied channel for transmission. For convenience of description, a time domain resource of less than 14 symbols (non-complete slot) relative to the slot boundary in the MCOT in the above MCOT is hereinafter referred to as a first time domain resource, one or more relative to a slot boundary. The time domain resource of 14 symbols (complete slot) is called the second time domain resource; the non-complete slot located at the end position in the MCOT is hereinafter referred to as the third time domain resource.
另外,所述LBT成功后,还可以在一个或者多个完整slot的时域资源上发送发送其它CORESET和被所述其它CORESET调度的数据,所述其它CORESET所在的符号位置记为第二符号位置集合。In addition, after the LBT succeeds, the other CORESETs and the data scheduled by the other CORESETs may be sent and sent on the time domain resources of the one or more complete slots, where the symbol positions of the other CORESETs are recorded as the second symbol positions. set.
所述CORESET包含公共搜索空间common search space和UE-specific搜索空间UE-specific search space。所述公共搜索空间用于承载公共控制信令和/或UE-specific控制信令,所述UE-specific搜索空间用于承载UE-specific控制信令。The CORESET includes a common search space common search space and a UE-specific search space UE-specific search space. The common search space is used to carry common control signaling and/or UE-specific control signaling, and the UE-specific search space is used to carry UE-specific control signaling.
可选的,所述公共控制信令包含第一公共控制信令,所述第一公共控制信令用于指示MCOT的配置信息,例如MCOT剩余持续时间或者MCOT的上下行配置。或者,可以理解为,所述第一公共控制信令用于指示信道占用时间(Channel Occupancy Time,COT)的配置信息,所述COT即指设备LBT成功后可以占用信道进行传输的时间,可以是网络侧通过控制信令配置的,前述实施方式中称为MCOT剩余持续时间。Optionally, the common control signaling includes a first common control signaling, where the first common control signaling is used to indicate configuration information of the MCOT, such as an MCOT remaining duration or an uplink and downlink configuration of the MCOT. Or, it may be understood that the first common control signaling is used to indicate configuration information of a channel Occupancy Time (COT), where the COT refers to a time when the device LBT can occupy the channel for transmission, which may be The network side is configured by control signaling, which is referred to as MCOT remaining duration in the foregoing embodiment.
可选的,所述公共控制信令包含第二公共控制信令,所述第二公共控制信令用于指示当前时隙属于第一时域资源,第二时域资源还是MCOT尾部部分时隙(称为第三时域资源)。Optionally, the common control signaling includes a second common control signaling, where the second common control signaling is used to indicate that the current time slot belongs to the first time domain resource, and the second time domain resource is still the MCOT tail part time slot. (called the third time domain resource).
可选的,所述公共控制信令包含第三公共控制信令,所述第三公共控制信令用于指示当前时隙是否属于第三时域资源。Optionally, the common control signaling includes a third common control signaling, where the third common control signaling is used to indicate whether the current time slot belongs to the third time domain resource.
可选的,所述公共控制信令包含第四公共控制信令,所述第四公共控制信令用于指示下一个配置的CORESET位置。Optionally, the common control signaling includes a fourth common control signaling, where the fourth common control signaling is used to indicate a CORESET location of the next configuration.
具体的,标准可以定义上述公共控制信令的一种,即能高效的指示CORESET所在的符号位置集合,从而降低UE的盲检开销。Specifically, the standard may define one of the foregoing common control signalings, that is, it can efficiently indicate the set of symbol positions where the CORESET is located, thereby reducing the blind detection overhead of the UE.
需要说明的是,本申请仅涉及从时域的角度(即符号symble),不涉及频域上的发送方式。在频域上,CORESET也有可能位于部分子带上,上述调用的符号位置可能是与所述CORESET相同的符号位置,这时,数据在相同符号位置上的其他子带上发送;上述CORESET上承载的控制信令调用的数据的符号位置,也可能是所述CORESET之后的符号位置。It should be noted that the present application only relates to the time domain (ie, symbol symble) and does not involve the transmission mode in the frequency domain. In the frequency domain, it is also possible for CORESET to be located on a partial sub-band. The symbol position of the above call may be the same symbol position as the CORESET. At this time, the data is transmitted on other sub-bands at the same symbol position; The symbol position of the data called by the control signaling may also be the symbol position after the CORESET.
上述标准针对第一时域资源的规定的允许承载控制信息的符号位置后续称为第一符号位置集合。The symbol position of the above-mentioned standard for the specified bearer control information for the first time domain resource is hereinafter referred to as the first symbol position set.
符号位置,符号索引,或者符号序号等所指含义实质相同。为描述方便,本文仅以符号位置为例,后文不赘述。The meanings of the symbol position, the symbol index, or the symbol number are substantially the same. For the convenience of description, the symbol position is taken as an example, and will not be described later.
相应的,接收侧,Correspondingly, the receiving side,
201a、接收信号,201a, receiving signals,
202a、至少在一个或者多个小于1个时隙slot的时域资源上,根据允许的mini-slot的组合,处理所述接收的信号;所述允许的mini-slot组合中的各个mini-slot的起始的符号位置,记为第一符号位置集合。202a. Processing the received signal according to a combination of allowed mini-slots on at least one or more time domain resources of less than 1 slot slot; each mini-slot in the allowed mini-slot combination The starting symbol position is recorded as the first symbol position set.
一般的,所述方法还包括:在一个或者多个14符号的时域资源上,接收完整的slot或者或者其它的mini-slot的组合,所述其它的mini-slot的组合的各个mini-slot的起始符号位置记为第二符号位置集合。较优的,所述第二符号位置集合与所述第一符号位置集合不同,当然,也有可能相同。In general, the method further includes: receiving, on one or more 14-symbol time domain resources, a complete slot or a combination of other mini-slots, each mini-slot of the combination of the other mini-slots The starting symbol position is recorded as a second set of symbol positions. Preferably, the second set of symbol positions is different from the first set of symbol positions, and of course, may be the same.
以下行为例,例如UE或者其他装置为接收侧,参考图7b,在该实施方式中包括:The following behavior example, such as the UE or other device is the receiving side, referring to FIG. 7b, in this embodiment includes:
201b、在时隙中的符号0或者0,1或者0,1和2上检测是否有控制信令。包括:公共搜索空间的公共控制信令和/或UE-specific控制信令以及承载于控制资源集CORESET UE-specific搜索空间的UE-specific控制信令;201b. Detect whether there is control signaling on the symbol 0 or 0, 1 or 0, 1 and 2 in the slot. The method includes: common control signaling and/or UE-specific control signaling of a common search space, and UE-specific control signaling carried in a control resource set CORESET UE-specific search space;
202b、在符号0或者符号0,1或者符号0,1和2上没有检索到所述控制信令时,在小于1个时隙的时域资源中,至少在所述第一符号位置集合中的各个符号起的连续n个符号上检测是否有控制信令(202),n为1或者2或者3。例如,公共搜索空间的公共控制信令和/或UE-specific控制信令以及承载于控制资源集CORESET UE-specific搜索空间的UE-specific控制信令。即,至少在前述第一时域资源上的前述第一符号位置集合上进行控制信令检测。202b. When the control signaling is not retrieved on symbol 0 or symbol 0, 1 or symbols 0, 1, and 2, in a time domain resource of less than 1 slot, at least in the first set of symbol locations Whether there is control signaling (202) on consecutive n symbols from each symbol, n is 1 or 2 or 3. For example, common control signaling and/or UE-specific control signaling of the common search space and UE-specific control signaling carried in the control resource set CORESET UE-specific search space. That is, control signaling detection is performed on at least the aforementioned first set of symbol locations on the first time domain resource.
另外,所述LBT成功后,还可以在一个或者多个完整slot的时域资源上发送发送其它CORESET和被所述其它CORESET调度的数据,所述其它CORESET所在的符号位置记为第二符号位置集合;In addition, after the LBT succeeds, the other CORESETs and the data scheduled by the other CORESETs may be sent and sent on the time domain resources of the one or more complete slots, where the symbol positions of the other CORESETs are recorded as the second symbol positions. set;
具体的检测过程,一般的,在前述第一符号位置集合和前述第二符号位置集合的并集的各个符号上,依次的检测。较优的,如果实施方式中发送了前述第一、第二、第三和第四公共控制信令中的任何一个,可以一定程度上减少检测的开销。The specific detection process is generally performed sequentially on each symbol of the union of the first symbol position set and the second symbol position set. Preferably, if any one of the foregoing first, second, third and fourth common control signaling is sent in the embodiment, the detection overhead can be reduced to some extent.
以第一符号位置集合{1,3,7}及第二符号位置集合{0}为例,前述“依次检测”流程包括:Taking the first symbol position set {1, 3, 7} and the second symbol position set {0} as an example, the foregoing "sequential detection" process includes:
UE首先尝试在符号0检测控制信令(slot边界处),如果没有检测到控制信令,则会跳到符号1继续检测,如果符号1还没有检测到则跳到符号3检测,如果符号3上还没有检测到则跳到符号7再次检测,UE在其它符号不会盲检控制信令以节省能量。The UE first attempts to detect control signaling at symbol 0 (at the slot boundary). If no control signaling is detected, it will jump to symbol 1 to continue the detection. If symbol 1 has not been detected, it will jump to symbol 3 detection if symbol 3 If it is not detected yet, it jumps to the symbol 7 to detect again, and the UE does not blindly check the control signaling in other symbols to save energy.
如果在符号0检测到所述第一公共控制信令,则根据第一公共控制信令承载的MCOT或者COT剩余持续时间,判断MCOT或者COT持续时间内的第二时域资源和/或第三时域资源(这时不可能有第一时域资源),并在相应的时域资源位置根据相应的CORESET符号位置集合进行检测。If the first common control signaling is detected at symbol 0, determining the second time domain resource and/or the third time of the MCOT or COT duration according to the MCOT or the remaining duration of the COT carried by the first common control signaling The time domain resource (at this time, there is no possibility of having the first time domain resource), and the corresponding time domain resource location is detected according to the corresponding CORESET symbol position set.
具体的,对于第二时域资源的检测,不涉及第一符号位置集合,不需要在第一符号位置集合{1,3,7}上进行检测;可以按照相关标准进行检测,或者采用本申请中其他实施方式中的第二符号位置集合进行检测。对于第三时域资源,需要按照第一和第二时域资源对应的CORESET符号位置集合的并集进行检测。后续不再赘述。Specifically, for the detection of the second time domain resource, the first symbol position set is not involved, and the detection is not performed on the first symbol position set {1, 3, 7}; the detection may be performed according to relevant standards, or the application is adopted. The second set of symbol positions in other embodiments is detected. For the third time domain resource, it is required to detect according to the union of the CORESET symbol position set corresponding to the first and second time domain resources. I will not repeat them later.
替换的,如果在符号0检测到所述第二公共控制信令,则根据第二公共控制信令承载的用于指示当前时隙属于第二时域资源或者第三时域资源,根据当前时隙所在的各个时域资源对应的各符号位置集合进行控制信令检测。Alternatively, if the second common control signaling is detected at the symbol 0, the bearer according to the second common control signaling is used to indicate that the current time slot belongs to the second time domain resource or the third time domain resource, according to the current time. Each set of symbol locations corresponding to each time domain resource in which the slot is located performs control signaling detection.
替换的,如果在符号0检测到所述第三公共控制信令,则根据第三公共控制信令判断当前时隙是否属于第三时域资源,如果属于第三时域资源,根据第一时域资源和第二时域资源对应的CORESET符号位置集合的并集进行检测进行控制信令监测;如果不属于第三时域资源,则按照第二符号位置集合进行检测。Alternatively, if the third common control signaling is detected at symbol 0, it is determined according to the third common control signaling whether the current time slot belongs to the third time domain resource, and if it belongs to the third time domain resource, according to the first time The union of the set of CORESET symbol locations corresponding to the domain resource and the second time domain resource is detected for control signaling monitoring; if not belonging to the third time domain resource, the detection is performed according to the second set of symbol locations.
替换的,如果在符号0检测到所述第四公共控制信令,则在该第四公共控制信令指 示的下一个CORESET所在的符号位置上,进行控制信令检测。Alternatively, if the fourth common control signaling is detected at symbol 0, control signaling detection is performed at the symbol position where the next CORESET indicated by the fourth common control signaling.
替换的,如果在符号0上检测到控制信令(例如位于第三时域资源的),但未检测到所述第一、第二、第三和第四公共控制信令中的任何一个,等同于没有检测到任何有助于后续CORESET监测的信令,则根据第一时域资源和第二时域资源对应的CORESET符号位置集合的并集进行检测。Alternatively, if control signaling is detected on symbol 0 (eg, located in the third time domain resource), but none of the first, second, third, and fourth common control signaling is detected, Equivalent to not detecting any signaling that facilitates subsequent CORESET monitoring, detecting based on the union of the first time domain resource and the CORESET symbol location set corresponding to the second time domain resource.
对于前述提到的如果跳到符号1上进行检测,类似的采用前述在符号0上的方法,,时域资源的信息会有所不同(符号3和7上的检测和1类似,不赘述):For the above-mentioned detection if jumping to symbol 1, and similarly using the above method on symbol 0, the information of the time domain resource will be different (the detections on symbols 3 and 7 are similar to 1 and will not be described). :
如果在符号1检测到所述第一公共控制信令,则根据第一公共控制信令承载的MCOT或者COT相关信息,判断MCOT或者COT持续时间内的第一时域资源,第二时域资源和\或第三时域资源,并在相应的时域资源位置根据相应的CORESET符号位置集合进行检测。If the first common control signaling is detected in the symbol 1, the first time domain resource and the second time domain resource in the duration of the MCOT or the COT are determined according to the MCOT or the COT related information carried by the first common control signaling. And / or third time domain resources, and detected in the corresponding time domain resource location according to the corresponding CORESET symbol location set.
替换的,如果在符号1检测到所述第二公共控制信令,则根据第二公共控制信令承载的用于指示当前时隙属于第一时域资源或第三时域资源,根据当前时隙所在的各个时域资源对应的各符号位置集合进行控制信令检测。Alternatively, if the second common control signaling is detected in the symbol 1, the second common control signaling is used to indicate that the current time slot belongs to the first time domain resource or the third time domain resource, according to the current time. Each set of symbol locations corresponding to each time domain resource in which the slot is located performs control signaling detection.
替换的,如果在符号1检测到所述第三公共控制信令,则根据第三公共控制信令判断当前时隙是否属于第三时域资源。如果属于第三时域资源,根据第一时域资源和第二时域资源对应的CORESET符号位置集合的并集进行检测进行控制信令监测;如果不属于第三时域资源,则按照第一符号位置集合进行检测。Alternatively, if the third common control signaling is detected at symbol 1, it is determined according to the third common control signaling whether the current time slot belongs to the third time domain resource. If it belongs to the third time domain resource, the control signaling is monitored according to the union of the first time domain resource and the CORESET symbol location set corresponding to the second time domain resource; if not belonging to the third time domain resource, the first A set of symbol locations is detected.
替换的,如果在符号1检测到所述第四公共控制信令,则在该第四公共控制信令指示的下一个CORESET所在的符号位置上,进行控制信令检测。Alternatively, if the fourth common control signaling is detected at symbol 1, control signaling detection is performed at a symbol position where the next CORESET indicated by the fourth common control signaling is located.
替换的,如果在符号1上检测到控制信令(例如位于第三时域资源的),但未检测到所述第一、第二、第三和第四公共控制信令中的任何一个,等同于没有检测到任何有助于后续CORESET监测的信令,则根据第一和第二时域资源对应的CORESET符号位置集合的并集进行检测。Alternatively, if control signaling is detected on symbol 1 (eg, located in the third time domain resource), but none of the first, second, third, and fourth common control signaling is detected, Equivalent to not detecting any signaling that facilitates subsequent CORESET monitoring, detecting based on the union of the set of CORESET symbol locations corresponding to the first and second time domain resources.
对于前述提到的如果跳到符号3或者符号7上进行检测的过程,类似的采用前述在符号1上的方法,不再赘述。For the above-mentioned process of jumping to the symbol 3 or the symbol 7 for detection, the similar method using the foregoing symbol 1 will not be described again.
前述的例子一第二符号位置集合{0}为例,替换的,第二符号位置集合也可以有多个符号,针对这些符号上的检测过程,与前述例子的符号0的检测过程类似,不再赘述。In the foregoing example, the second symbol position set {0} is taken as an example. Alternatively, the second symbol position set may also have multiple symbols. The detection process on the symbols is similar to the detection process of the symbol 0 in the foregoing example, and is not Let me repeat.
需要说明的是,第二符号位置集合和第一符号位置集合中具有公共的元素I时,针对元素I的检测过程于前述方法类似。但是,在发送第一公共控制信令的方案中,判断时域资源的可能性时包括:第一时域资源,第二时域资源和第三时域资源中的任意组合。在发送第二公共控制信令的方案中,判断时域资源的可能性时包括:第一时域资源,第二时域资源或者第三时域资源。It should be noted that when the second symbol position set and the first symbol position set have a common element I, the detection process for the element I is similar to the foregoing method. However, in the solution for transmitting the first common control signaling, the possibility of determining the time domain resource includes: any combination of the first time domain resource, the second time domain resource, and the third time domain resource. In the solution for transmitting the second common control signaling, the possibility of determining the time domain resource includes: a first time domain resource, a second time domain resource or a third time domain resource.
如前文所述,对于前述各公共控制信令指示的第二时域资源,不涉及第一符号位置集合,不需要在第一符号位置集合{1,3,7}上进行检测;可以按照相关标准进行检测,或者采用本申请中其他实施方式中的第二符号位置集合进行检测。对于第三时域资源,需要按照第一和第二时域资源对应的CORESET符号位置集合的并集进行检测。这样,可 以节省检测的开销,UE可以减少功耗和增长使用寿命。As described above, the second time domain resource indicated by each of the foregoing common control signaling does not involve the first symbol position set, and does not need to be detected on the first symbol position set {1, 3, 7}; The standard is tested or detected using a second set of symbol positions in other embodiments of the present application. For the third time domain resource, it is required to detect according to the union of the CORESET symbol position set corresponding to the first and second time domain resources. In this way, the overhead of detection can be saved, and the UE can reduce power consumption and increase the service life.
下面通过多个方面或者实施例详细说明本申请提供的方案。The solution provided by the present application is described in detail below through various aspects or embodiments.
(一)MCOT或者COT起始或者末尾的非完整slot上的帧结构(1) Frame structure on the incomplete slot of the MCOT or COT start or end
在步骤101a和102a,101b和102b中,在非完整slot上发送的mini-slot组合中的各个mini-slot,遵循规定的mini-slot的结构。标准规定了mini-slot的可能的结构,比如,长度为2,4或者7,CORESET在各个mini-slot中的前n个符号位置上(n小于mini-slot符号长度和3中的较短者)。标准中还可以继续规定mini-slot的其他结构或者细节,不会影响本申请的实施。In steps 101a and 102a, 101b and 102b, each mini-slot in the mini-slot combination transmitted on the non-complete slot follows the structure of the specified mini-slot. The standard specifies the possible structure of the mini-slot, for example, the length is 2, 4 or 7, CORESET is in the first n symbol positions in each mini-slot (n is less than the mini-slot symbol length and the shorter of 3) ). Other structures or details of the mini-slot may continue to be specified in the standard and will not affect the implementation of this application.
另外,各个实施方式中仅涉及时域上的帧结构,在频域上mini-slot和slot的发送方式不受限制。例如,CORESET可以仅位于前n个符号的部分子带上。In addition, in each embodiment, only the frame structure in the time domain is involved, and the transmission manner of the mini-slot and the slot in the frequency domain is not limited. For example, CORESET can be located only on a partial subband of the first n symbols.
在发送侧(下行的网络侧或者上行的终端侧),前述方法还可以包括:The foregoing method may further include: on the sending side (the downlink network side or the uplink terminal side):
100、可选的,准备一个或者多个待发送的mini-slot,即生成并缓存一个或者多个mini-slot。这个步骤与LBT的过程可以并行的进行,或者其时间不受LBT的影响。只要在LBT成功时,有足够的mini-slot可以被发送,从而节省一定的通信等待时间。100. Optionally, one or more mini-slots to be sent are prepared, that is, one or more mini-slots are generated and cached. This step can be performed in parallel with the LBT process, or its time is not affected by the LBT. As long as the LBT is successful, there are enough mini-slots to be sent, saving some communication waiting time.
为了实现高效的通信效率,在LBT成功后,应该采用一个或者多个mini-slot尽量填满LBT成功后以及第一个完整的slot开始前的所有符号位置,即第1个符号到第一个非完整slot结束时。具体的,采用后对齐的方式进行填满,可以最大限度的保证下一个完整slot的结构的开始。所以,本申请实施方式提供了后对齐的可能(允许)的mini-slot组合,也就是说,规定了允许的CORESET的位置。In order to achieve efficient communication efficiency, after the LBT is successful, one or more mini-slots should be used to fill all the symbol positions after the successful LBT and before the start of the first complete slot, ie the first symbol to the first one. At the end of the non-complete slot. Specifically, filling in the post-alignment manner can maximize the start of the structure of the next complete slot. Therefore, embodiments of the present application provide a possible (allowed) mini-slot combination of post-alignment, that is, specifying the location of the allowed CORESET.
另外,在接收侧,较优的,根据预先配置的n,在第一符号位置集合和第二符号位置集合的并集中的各个符号起的连续n个符号上,检测是否有控制信令。In addition, on the receiving side, preferably, according to the pre-configured n, whether there is control signaling on consecutive n symbols from each of the first symbol position set and the second symbol position set.
具体的例子中,在接收侧,在时隙中的符号0或者0,1或者0,1和2上检测是否有控制信令;(201);In a specific example, on the receiving side, it is detected whether there is control signaling on the symbol 0 or 0, 1 or 0, 1 and 2 in the slot; (201);
在符号0或者符号0,1或者符号0,1和2上没有检索到所述控制信令时,在小于1个时隙的时域资源中,至少在所述第一符号位置集合中的各个符号起的连续n个符号上检测是否有控制信令(202),n为1或者2或者3。When the control signaling is not retrieved on symbol 0 or symbol 0, 1 or symbols 0, 1 and 2, in at least one time slot resource, at least in the first symbol position set Whether there is control signaling (202) on consecutive n symbols from the symbol, n is 1 or 2 or 3.
在说明上述规定了允许的CORESET的位置之前,先介绍非完整slot上各种可能的mini-slot组合以及相应的CORESET的符号位置(UE应该至少检测的符号位置)。Before explaining the above-specified position of the allowed CORESET, the various possible mini-slot combinations on the non-complete slot and the corresponding symbol positions of the CORESET (the symbol positions at which the UE should be detected) are first introduced.
第一类mini-slot组合及应该至少检测的符号位置:The first type of mini-slot combination and the symbol position that should be detected at least:
图中白色符号代表此时LBT未通过,设备无法在该符号发送数据;斜线,横线,灰色,分别代表不同长度的mini-slot。参考图9,gNB在slot内最多传输长度为2,4,7符号的mini-slot各1个,NR-U一共可支持7个不同符号起点的非完整slot调度(non-slot based scheduling)。NR-U采用上述方法进行非完整slot调度,UE需要检测DCI的符号位置集合所有可能性列举如下:The white symbol in the figure indicates that the LBT has not passed at this time, the device cannot send data in the symbol; the diagonal line, the horizontal line, and the gray color respectively represent mini-slots of different lengths. Referring to FIG. 9, the gNB transmits up to one mini-slot each having a length of 2, 4, and 7 symbols in the slot, and the NR-U can support a total of seven non-slot based scheduling of different symbol starting points. The NR-U adopts the above method for non-complete slot scheduling, and all the possibilities for the UE to detect the symbol location set of the DCI are listed as follows:
1.NR-U支持符号起点为1的非完整slot调度,NR-U在非完整slot内最多调度3个不同长度的mini-slot进行发送:1. NR-U supports non-complete slot scheduling with symbol starting point of 1. NR-U schedules up to 3 mini-slots of different lengths for transmission in non-complete slots:
gNB发送一个2符号,一个4符号和一个7符号的mini-slot,UE应该在符号{0,1,3,7}或{0,1,3,10}或{0,1,5,7}或{0,1,5,12}或{0,1,8,12}或{0,1,8,10}进行DCI检测,或者在上述符号的交集即符号{0,1,3,5,7,8,10,12}起始的n个符号上检测DCI(图9中Alternative 1)。gNB sends a 2 symbol, a 4 symbol and a 7 symbol mini-slot, the UE should be in the symbol {0,1,3,7} or {0,1,3,10} or {0,1,5,7 } or {0,1,5,12} or {0,1,8,12} or {0,1,8,10} for DCI detection, or at the intersection of the above symbols, ie the symbol {0,1,3, The DCI is detected on the first n symbols of 5, 7, 8, 10, 12} (Alternative 1 in Fig. 9).
2.NR-U在非完整slot内调度1个mini-slot进行发送:2. NR-U schedules a mini-slot for transmission in a non-complete slot:
gNB发送一个2符号的mini-slot,UE应该在符号{0,12}起始的n个符号上进行DCI检测(图9中Alternative 7);或者,The gNB sends a 2-symbol mini-slot, and the UE should perform DCI detection on the n symbols starting from the symbol {0, 12} (Alternative 7 in Figure 9); or,
gNB发送一个4符号的mini-slot,UE应该在符号{0,10}起始的n个符号上进行DCI检测(图9中Alternative 6);或者,The gNB sends a 4-symbol mini-slot, and the UE should perform DCI detection on the n symbols starting from the symbol {0, 10} (Alternative 6 in Figure 9); or,
gNB发送一个7符号的mini-slot,UE应该在符号{0,7}起始的n个符号上进行DCI检测(图9中Alternative 4)。The gNB sends a 7-symbol mini-slot, and the UE should perform DCI detection on the n symbols starting at the symbol {0, 7} (Alternative 4 in Figure 9).
3.NR-U在非完整slot内最多调度2个不同长度的mini-slot进行发送3. NR-U schedules up to 2 mini-slots of different lengths for transmission in non-complete slots.
gNB发送一个4符号和7符号的mini-slot,UE应该在符号{0,3,7}或{0,3,10}起始的n个符号上进行DCI检测,或者在上述两者的交集即符号{0,3,7,10}起始的n个符号上检测DCI(图9中Alternative 2);或者The gNB sends a 4-symbol and 7-symbol mini-slot, and the UE should perform DCI detection on the n symbols starting from the symbol {0, 3, 7} or {0, 3, 10}, or at the intersection of the two. That is, the DCI is detected on the n symbols starting from the symbol {0, 3, 7, 10} (Alternative 2 in Figure 9); or
gNB发送一个2符号和7符号的mini-slot,UE应该在符号{0,5,7}或{0,5,12}起始的n个符号上进行DCI检测,或者在上述两者的交集即符号{0,5,7,12}起始的n个符号上检测DCI(图9中Alternative 3);或者The gNB sends a 2-symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot, and the UE should perform DCI detection on the n symbols starting from the symbol {0, 5, 7} or {0, 5, 12}, or at the intersection of the two. That is, the DCI is detected on the n symbols starting from the symbol {0, 5, 7, 12} (Alternative 3 in Figure 9); or
gNB发送一个2符号和4符号的mini-slot,UE应该在符号{0,8,10}或{0,8,12}起始的n个符号上进行DCI检测,或者在上述两者的交集即符号{0,8,10,12}起始的n个符号上检测DCI(图9中Alternative 5)。The gNB sends a 2-symbol and 4-symbol mini-slot, and the UE should perform DCI detection on the n symbols starting from the symbol {0, 8, 10} or {0, 8, 12}, or at the intersection of the two. That is, the DCI is detected on the n symbols starting from the symbol {0, 8, 10, 12} (Alternative 5 in Fig. 9).
第二类mini-slot组合及应该至少检测的符号位置:The second type of mini-slot combination and the symbol position that should be detected at least:
相对于第一类,放宽对调度限制:gNB支持在一个slot内能够传输长度为2,4,7符号的mini-slot 2个(每种长度最多2个)时,gNB在非完整slot传输可以额外支持3种不同起点位置,如图8所示。Compared with the first class, the scheduling restriction is relaxed: gNB supports two mini-slots with a length of 2, 4, and 7 symbols in one slot (up to two for each length), and the gNB can be transmitted in a non-complete slot. Additional support for 3 different starting positions is shown in Figure 8.
采用上述方法对NR-U在非完整slot调度,UE需要检测DCI的符号位置集合所有可能性列举如下:Using the above method to NR-U in non-complete slot scheduling, the UE needs to detect the symbol location set of DCI. All possibilities are listed as follows:
1、NR-U在非完整slot内调度2个长度相同的mini-slot进行数据发送1. NR-U schedules two mini-slots of the same length for transmission in a non-complete slot.
gNB发送数据包含2个2符号的mini-slot,UE应该在符号{0,10,12}起始的n个符号上进行DCI检测。The gNB transmission data contains two 2-symbol mini-slots, and the UE should perform DCI detection on the n symbols starting from the symbol {0, 10, 12}.
gNB发送数据包含2个4符号的mini-slot,UE应该在符号{0,6,10}起始的n个符号上进行DCI检测(如图8中Alternative 10)。The gNB transmission data contains two 4-symbol mini-slots, and the UE should perform DCI detection on the n symbols starting from the symbol {0, 6, 10} (as shown in Figure 10, Alternative 10).
gNB发送数据包含2个7符号的mini-slot,UE应该在符号{0,7}起始的n个符号上进行DCI检测。The gNB transmission data contains two 7-symbol mini-slots, and the UE should perform DCI detection on the n symbols starting from the symbol {0, 7}.
2、NR-U在非完整slot内调度2个长度相同的mini-slot以及1个长度不同的 mini-slot进行数据发送2. The NR-U schedules two mini-slots of the same length and one mini-slot of different lengths for transmission in a non-complete slot.
gNB发送数据包含2个2符号以及1个4符号的mini-slot,UE应该在符号{0,6,8,10}或{0,6,8,12}或{0,6,10,12}起始的n个符号上进行DCI检测,或者在上述符号的交集即符号{0,6,8,10,12}起始的n个符号上检测DCI。The gNB sends data containing 2 2 symbols and 1 4 symbol mini-slot. The UE should be at the symbol {0,6,8,10} or {0,6,8,12} or {0,6,10,12 The DCI detection is performed on the first n symbols, or the DCI is detected on the n symbols starting from the intersection of the symbols, ie, the symbols {0, 6, 8, 10, 12}.
gNB发送数据包含2个2符号以及1个7符号的mini-slot,UE应该在符号{0,3,5,7}或{0,3,5,12}或{0,3,10,12}进行DCI检测,或者在上述符号的交集即符号{0,3,5,7,10,12}起始的n个符号上检测DCI。The gNB sends data containing 2 2 symbols and 1 7-symbol mini-slot. The UE should be in the symbol {0, 3, 5, 7} or {0, 3, 5, 12} or {0, 3, 10, 12 } Perform DCI detection, or detect DCI on the n symbols starting from the intersection of the above symbols, ie, the symbols {0, 3, 5, 7, 10, 12}.
gNB发送数据包含2个4符号以及1个2符号的mini-slot,UE应该在符号{0,4,6,10}或{0,4,8,10}或{0,4,8,12}进行DCI检测,或者在上述符号的交集即符号{0,4,6,8,10,12}起始的n个符号上检测DCI(如图8中Alternative 9)。The gNB sends data containing 2 4 symbols and 1 2 symbol mini-slot. The UE should be at the symbol {0,4,6,10} or {0,4,8,10} or {0,4,8,12 } Perform DCI detection, or detect DCI on the n symbols starting from the intersection of the above symbols, ie, the symbols {0, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12} (as in Alternative 9 in Figure 8).
3、NR-U在非完整slot内调度4个mini-slot进行数据发送3. NR-U schedules 4 mini-slots for data transmission in non-complete slots.
gNB发送数据2个2符号以及2个4符号的mini-slot,UE应该在符号{0,2,4,6,10}或{0,2,4,8,10}或{0,2,4,8,12}或{0,2,6,10,12}或{0,2,6,8,12}或{0,2,6,8,10}起始的n个符号上进行DCI检测,或者在上述符号的交集即符号{0,2,4,6,8,10,12}检测DCI(如图8中Alternative 8)。gNB sends data 2 2 symbols and 2 4 symbols mini-slot, UE should be in the symbol {0, 2, 4, 6, 10} or {0, 2, 4, 8, 10} or {0, 2, 4,8,12} or {0,2,6,10,12} or {0,2,6,8,12} or {0,2,6,8,10} starting from the n symbols The DCI detects, or detects the DCI at the intersection of the above symbols, ie, the symbols {0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12} (as shown in Figure 8 in Alternative 8).
(二)关于第一符号位置集合(2) About the first symbol position set
基于(一)种可能的mini-slot组合,优选了其中部分,作为前述第一符号位置集合,标准可以规定其中的一种或者多种。在实施过程中会有所不同:Based on (a) possible mini-slot combinations, a portion thereof is preferred, and as the aforementioned first set of symbol positions, the standard may specify one or more of them. It will be different during the implementation process:
在网络侧:On the network side:
101-1、标准仅定义一种第一符号位置集合。也就是说,mini-slot的可能的(允许的)组合只有一套。或者说,标准直接定义在第一时域资源中的允许的mini-slot的类型、数量和位置。也可以理解为,各个mini-slot的CORESET可能在第一时域资源所在的slot中的哪些符号起始的n个符号位置上。101-1. The standard defines only one set of first symbol positions. In other words, there is only one set of possible (allowed) combinations of mini-slots. Or, the standard directly defines the type, number, and location of allowed mini-slots in the first time domain resource. It can also be understood that the CORESET of each mini-slot may be at the n symbol positions starting from which symbols in the slot in which the first time domain resource is located.
101-2、标准定义多种第一符号位置集合。也就是说,mini-slot的可能的(允许的)组合有多套。每个第一符号位置集合中,各个CORESET的可能的符号位置不完全相同。例如,后文所述的例子1-例子7中的任意两个以上的符号位置集合。101-2. The standard defines a plurality of first symbol position sets. That is to say, there are multiple sets of possible (allowed) combinations of mini-slots. In each first set of symbol positions, the possible symbol positions of the respective CORESETs are not identical. For example, in the examples 1 to 5 described later, any two or more symbol position sets in the example 7.
具体的,101-2的方案中,gNB可以发送RRC或者其他信令,用于明示或者隐式的向UE指示当前网络使用的第一符号位置集合;以便于UE在当前网络使用的(配置的)符号位置上进行检测。每个第一符号位置集合可以有自己的索引index,或者采用位图的方式进行指示,或者采用其他的方式与其他信息进行复用。显然,101.a的方案中不需要上述步骤。Specifically, in the solution of 101-2, the gNB may send RRC or other signaling, for explicitly or implicitly indicating to the UE, a first set of symbol locations used by the current network; so that the UE is used in the current network (configured The detection is performed at the symbol position. Each first set of symbol positions may have its own index index, or may be indicated by means of a bitmap, or may be multiplexed with other information in other manners. Obviously, the above steps are not needed in the 101.a scheme.
例如,用1个14比特的bitmap(比特位图)来指示,每个比特位对应于slot内的一个OFDM符号,比特位的值为“1”则表明UE在该符号位置需要进行DCI盲检,置“0”表明UE在该符号位置不需要进行DCI盲检,也可以反过来指示,置“0”表示UE在该符号位置需要进行DCI盲检,置“1”表示UE在该符号位置不需要进行DCI盲检。For example, a 14-bit bitmap is used to indicate that each bit corresponds to an OFDM symbol in the slot, and the value of the bit is "1", indicating that the UE needs to perform DCI blind detection at the symbol position. "0" indicates that the UE does not need to perform DCI blind detection at the symbol position, and may also indicate that the "0" indicates that the UE needs to perform DCI blind detection at the symbol position, and "1" indicates that the UE is at the symbol position. No DCI blind inspection is required.
又例如,当第一符号位置集合有限时,如NR-U只支持在位置0上检测以外,在{3,7}或{3,7,10}两种符号位置集合时,只需要1比特就可以指示UE应使用的DCI盲检配置。For another example, when the first symbol position set is limited, if the NR-U only supports detection at position 0, only 1 bit is needed when the {3, 7} or {3, 7, 10} symbol position sets are combined. It can indicate the DCI blind check configuration that the UE should use.
较优的第一符号位置集合包括但不限于:A preferred first set of symbol locations includes, but is not limited to:
例子1,{1,3,7}:Example 1, {1, 3, 7}:
符号0上没有CORESET时,仅可能在符号{1,3,7}上承载CORESET。即,接收侧可以只在4个符号上检测是否有CORESET,这4个符号是0,1,3,7。When there is no CORESET on symbol 0, it is only possible to carry CORESET on the symbol {1, 3, 7}. That is, the receiving side can detect whether there is CORESET on only 4 symbols, and these 4 symbols are 0, 1, 3, 7.
例子2,{3,7,10}:Example 2, {3, 7, 10}:
符号0上没有CORESET时,仅可能在符号{3,7,10}上承载CORESET。其含义不赘述。When there is no CORESET on symbol 0, it is only possible to carry CORESET on the symbol {3, 7, 10}. Its meaning is not described.
例子3,{3,7}:Example 3, {3, 7}:
符号0上没有CORESET时,仅可能在符号{3,7}上承载CORESET。When there is no CORESET on symbol 0, it is only possible to carry CORESET on symbol {3, 7}.
例子4,{7,10}:Example 4, {7, 10}:
符号0上没有CORESET时,仅可能在符号{7,10}上承载CORESET。When there is no CORESET on symbol 0, it is only possible to carry CORESET on symbol {7, 10}.
例子5,{5,7,12}:Example 5, {5, 7, 12}:
符号0上没有CORESET时,仅可能在符号{5,7,12}上承载CORESET。When there is no CORESET on symbol 0, it is only possible to carry CORESET on the symbol {5, 7, 12}.
例子6,{5,7}:Example 6, {5, 7}:
符号0上没有CORESET时,仅可能在符号{5,7}上承载CORESET;When there is no CORESET on symbol 0, it is only possible to carry CORESET on symbol {5,7};
例子7,{7,12}:Example 7, {7, 12}:
符号0上没有CORESET时,仅可能在符号{7,12}上承载CORESET。When there is no CORESET on symbol 0, it is only possible to carry CORESET on symbol {7, 12}.
上述实施方式中,在LBT成功后的非完整slot上也承载需要发送的信息,可以高效的利用资源。另一方面,相对于在非完整slot中每个符号上都有可能承载CORESET的方案,通过规定可能承载CORESET的符号位置,可以简化发送的过程,相应的,可以简化接收侧的盲检CORESET的复杂度。In the above embodiment, the information to be transmitted is also carried on the non-complete slot after the successful LBT, and the resource can be utilized efficiently. On the other hand, the scheme of carrying the CORESET on each symbol in the non-complete slot can simplify the transmission process by specifying the symbol position that may carry the CORESET. Accordingly, the blind detection CORESET on the receiving side can be simplified. the complexity.
(三)完整slot上的帧结构(3) Frame structure on the complete slot
前文101a-102a,101b-102b的方案中提到,LBT成功后的MCOT中,可能包括一个或者多个完整slot长度的时域资源(14个符号)。完整14个符号可以采用已有的slot帧结构,也可以是多个mini-slot的组合。As mentioned in the schemes of the foregoing 101a-102a, 101b-102b, in the MCOT after successful LBT, one or more time domain resources (14 symbols) of complete slot length may be included. The complete 14 symbols can be either an existing slot frame structure or a combination of multiple mini-slots.
较优的,在所述LBT成功后,还在一个或者多个完整slot的时域资源上发送其它CORESET和被所述其它CORESET调度的数据,所述其它CORESET所在的符号位置记为第二符号位置集合;所述第二符号位置集合与所述第一符号位置集合不同。Preferably, after the LBT succeeds, other CORESETs and data scheduled by the other CORESETs are also sent on the time domain resources of one or more complete slots, and the symbol positions of the other CORESETs are recorded as the second symbols. a set of locations; the second set of symbol locations being different from the first set of symbol locations.
NR(3GPP R15)中规定,完整的1个slot内的CORESET数目小于等于3,CORESET可以在任意位置发送。因此,对于完整slot的调度gNB大概率会在符号0处发CORESET,其它位置是否发CORESET,以及CORESET数量均不确定。在接收侧,至少应该在符号0处进行CORESET的检测。采用上述方案时,即第二符号位置集合仅有{0}。NR (3GPP R15) stipulates that the number of CORESETs in a complete slot is less than or equal to 3, and CORESET can be sent at any position. Therefore, for the complete slot scheduling gNB high probability will send CORESET at symbol 0, whether other positions send CORESET, and the number of CORESET is uncertain. On the receiving side, the detection of CORESET should be performed at least at symbol 0. When the above scheme is adopted, the second symbol position set has only {0}.
本实施方式中的完整slot遵循上述规定,还有可能有进一步的优化实施方式,例如,标准可以进一步针对unlicensed频谱规定完整slot中允许的mini-slot的组合(mini-slot)。The complete slot in this embodiment follows the above provisions, and there may be further optimized implementations. For example, the standard may further specify a mini-slot of mini-slots allowed in the complete slot for the unlicensed spectrum.
例如,网络设备侧可以在完整的slot内使用2个7符号的mini-slot,即仅可能在符号{0,7}上承载CORESET。或者,可以在完整的slot内使用3个4符号和1个2符号的mini-slot,即仅可能在符号{0,7}或符号{0,2,6,10}上承载CORESET。相应的,在终端侧,应该至少在符号{0,7}上或者符号{0,2,6,10}上进行CORESET检测。上述符号集合即前述针对完整slot的第二符号位置集合。For example, the network device side can use two 7-symbol mini-slots in a complete slot, ie it is only possible to carry CORESET on the symbol {0, 7}. Alternatively, three 4 symbols and a 2 symbol mini-slot can be used in the complete slot, ie it is only possible to carry CORESET on the symbol {0, 7} or the symbol {0, 2, 6, 10}. Correspondingly, on the terminal side, CORESET detection should be performed on at least the symbol {0, 7} or the symbol {0, 2, 6, 10}. The above set of symbols is the aforementioned second set of symbol positions for the complete slot.
标准可以限定上述第二符号位置集合中的1种,或者2种或者更多种。多种时,网络设备侧,也可以发送当前的第二符号位置集合的指示,以便于UE针对完整slot采用被指示的第二符号位置集合。The standard may define one of the above second set of symbol positions, or two or more. In a plurality of cases, the network device side may also send an indication of the current second set of symbol positions, so that the UE adopts the indicated second set of symbol positions for the complete slot.
(四)其它相关的信息(4) Other relevant information
可选的,上述101a-102a,101b-102b的方法中,对于下行,还包括:103、可以在LBT成功后向UE发送用于指示(标识)MCOT的起始位置的信息,例如是公共信息。具体的一个特例,该MCOT起始位置是slot中的符号位置0,则前述实施方式只包括第二时域资源。该公共信息可以是一个公共的参考信号,如DMRS或是公共控制信息,如group common PDCCH。步骤102和101没有先后关系。上述公共信息不是承载在前述CORESET上的。Optionally, in the method of the foregoing 101a-102a, 101b-102b, for the downlink, the method further includes: 103, after the LBT succeeds, sending, to the UE, information for indicating (identifying) the starting position of the MCOT, for example, public information. . In a specific case, the MCOT starting position is the symbol position 0 in the slot, and the foregoing embodiment includes only the second time domain resource. The public information can be a common reference signal, such as DMRS or common control information, such as group common PDCCH. Steps 102 and 101 have no sequential relationship. The above public information is not carried on the aforementioned CORESET.
相应的,对于下行,接收侧的方法中,可选的,200、接收用于指示(标识)MCOT的起始位置的信息。结合101a-102a,101b-102b中的方案,在第一符号位置集合和第二符号位置集合的并集中,并且,位于MCOT的起始位置所在的符号或其后的符号上,进行控制信令检测。Correspondingly, for the downlink, the receiving side, optionally, 200, receiving information for indicating (identifying) the starting position of the MCOT. Combining the schemes in 101a-102a, 101b-102b, control aggregation is performed on the union of the first symbol location set and the second symbol location set, and the symbol located at the start position of the MCOT or the symbol subsequent thereto Detection.
另一个替换的实施方式中,可以不包括上述步骤103,这时接收侧应在第一符号位置集合和第二符号位置集合的并集上进行CORESET检测。在并集以外的符号位置上,不进行检测,从而一方面保证及时准确的获得信息,并减少检测的复杂度,降低损耗。In another alternative embodiment, step 103 above may not be included, in which case the receiving side shall perform CORESET detection on the union of the first set of symbol locations and the second set of symbol locations. At the symbol position outside the union, no detection is performed, thereby ensuring timely and accurate information acquisition on the one hand, and reducing the complexity of detection and reducing the loss.
上述用于指示(标识)MCOT的起始位置的信息可以是一段序列。在接收侧,终端先检测前述序列,获得MCOT的起始位置,再根据第一符号位置集合和第二符号位置集合进行检测。The above information for indicating (identifying) the starting position of the MCOT may be a sequence. On the receiving side, the terminal first detects the foregoing sequence, obtains the starting position of the MCOT, and then performs detection according to the first symbol position set and the second symbol position set.
为使本发明更为清楚,参考图7c和图7d,提供了上行的实施方式。To make the invention clearer, reference is made to Figures 7c and 7d to provide an upstream embodiment.
100 gNB通过RRC信令和/或PDCCH发送上行传输配置信息给UE,UE可以在配置的时频资源内进行PUSCH的传输。较优的,所述上行传输配置信息包括:一个或者多个slot的数量信息(完整的14个OFDM符号)。基于COT的起始位置以及LBT成功的时间等情况,该配置的时频资源在UE能够使用时,时域上的持续时间可能小于上述配置的一个或者多个slot,即,UE进行上行传输的时频资源可以小于1个时隙slot,也可以大于等于1个时隙slot。The 100 gNB sends uplink transmission configuration information to the UE through RRC signaling and/or PDCCH, and the UE can perform PUSCH transmission in the configured time-frequency resource. Preferably, the uplink transmission configuration information includes: quantity information of one or more slots (complete 14 OFDM symbols). Based on the start position of the COT and the time when the LBT is successful, the time-frequency resource of the configuration may be less than the one or more slots configured in the time domain, that is, the UE performs uplink transmission. The time-frequency resource may be less than one slot slot, or may be greater than or equal to one slot slot.
在发送侧(UE),主要包括:On the transmitting side (UE), it mainly includes:
101c UE进行LBT;101c UE performs LBT;
102c在LBT成功后,UE在调度或者配置的上行时域资源内(即,位于配置的时域资源中的,在LBT成功后的剩余时间内),发送允许的mini-slot组合;所述允许的mini-slot组合中的各个mini-slot的起始的符号位置,记为第一符号位置集合。After the LBT succeeds, the UE sends the allowed mini-slot combination in the scheduled or configured uplink time domain resource (that is, in the configured time domain resource, remaining time after the LBT succeeds); The starting symbol position of each mini-slot in the mini-slot combination is recorded as the first set of symbol positions.
当然,基于发送的起始OFDM符号是否在slot的边界,UE也有可能仅发送完整的一个或者多个slot,本文对仅发送完整的slot的发送方法不赘述。Certainly, based on whether the transmitted initial OFDM symbol is at the boundary of the slot, the UE may also send only one or more complete slots. The method for transmitting only the complete slot is not described herein.
具体的,根据后文描述的mini-slot结构,对于上行传输,参考图7d,本发明实施方式也可以描述为:Specifically, according to the mini-slot structure described later, for uplink transmission, referring to FIG. 7d, the embodiment of the present invention may also be described as:
101d、配置用于进行上行信道测量的解调参考信号(Demodulation Reference Signal:DMRS);其中,对于小于1个时隙slot的时域资源,所述DMRS位于规定的可能(允许)承载的符号位置上。即,根据允许发送的mini-slot组合,在各个mini-slot中被允许承载DMRS的OFDM符号上承载DMRS信号。101d. Demodulation Reference Signal (DMRS) configured for performing uplink channel measurement; wherein, for a time domain resource of less than 1 slot, the DMRS is located at a specified possible (allowed) bearer symbol position on. That is, the DMRS signal is carried on the OFDM symbols that are allowed to carry the DMRS in each mini-slot according to the mini-slot combination that is allowed to be transmitted.
102d、在LBT成功后,根据LBT成功后的起始位置是否在slot边界,发送完整的slot或者一个或者多个允许的mini-slot组合。102d. After the success of the LBT, according to whether the starting position after the successful LBT is at the slot boundary, send a complete slot or one or more allowed mini-slot combinations.
较优的,PUSCH中包括一个或者多个mini-slot或者slot,在mini-slot或者slot的第一个OFDM符号上承载DMRS信号。Preferably, the PUSCH includes one or more mini-slots or slots, and carries the DMRS signal on the first OFDM symbol of the mini-slot or slot.
与完整的slot相比,上述小于1个时隙的时域资源可以称为非完整slot(non-slot)。UE在LBT成功后进行上行传输时隙中,还可以包括一个或者多个完整slot。UE在LBT成功后允许占用信道进行传输的持续时间由gNB配置。为描述方便,上述上行传输时隙中的位于起始位置的相对于slot边界的一个小于14个符号(非完整slot)的时域资源,后续称为第一时域资源,一个或者多个相对于slot边界的长度为14个符号的(完整slot)的时域资源称为第二时域资源;位于上行传输的末尾位置一个的非完整slot后续称为第三时域资源。Compared with the complete slot, the above-mentioned time domain resources of less than 1 time slot may be referred to as non-slots. The UE may further include one or more complete slots in the uplink transmission time slot after the LBT succeeds. The duration that the UE allows the occupied channel to transmit after the LBT succeeds is configured by the gNB. For convenience of description, a time domain resource of less than 14 symbols (non-complete slot) relative to the slot boundary in the uplink transmission time slot in the above uplink transmission time slot is hereinafter referred to as a first time domain resource, one or more relative The time domain resource with a length of 14 symbols (complete slot) at the slot boundary is called a second time domain resource; a non-complete slot located at the end of the uplink transmission is hereinafter referred to as a third time domain resource.
上述102d包括但不限于:The above 102d includes but is not limited to:
102d-1、所述LBT成功后,在起始位置发送一个或者多个mini-slot,包括DMRS和上行数据。102d-1. After the LBT succeeds, one or more mini-slots, including DMRS and uplink data, are sent at the starting location.
102d-2,所述LBT成功后,在起始位置的一个或者多个mini-slot之后(或者,LBT成功后的起始位置在slot边界时),UE还可以在一个或者多个完整slot的时域资源上发送DMRS和被调度的上行数据,所述DMRS所在的符号位置记为第二符号位置集合。102d-2, after the LBT succeeds, after one or more mini-slots of the starting position (or, when the starting position of the LBT succeeds is at the slot boundary), the UE may also be in one or more complete slots. The DMRS and the scheduled uplink data are sent on the time domain resource, and the symbol position where the DMRS is located is recorded as the second symbol position set.
102d-3,所述LBT成功后,UE还可以在传输的末尾位置一个的非完整slot上发送DMRS和被调度上行数据,所述DMRS所在的符号位置记为第三符号位置集合。102d-3, after the LBT succeeds, the UE may further send the DMRS and the scheduled uplink data on a non-complete slot at the end of the transmission, where the symbol position of the DMRS is recorded as a third symbol position set.
需要说明的是,如前文所述,各实施方式仅涉及从时域的角度(即符号symbol),不涉及频域上的发送方式。在频域上,DMRS和被调度的数据也有可能位于部分子带上,如上述DMRS和被调度数据在相同时隙内的不同子带上进行发送。It should be noted that, as described above, each embodiment relates only to the time domain (ie, symbol symbol), and does not relate to the transmission mode in the frequency domain. In the frequency domain, it is also possible that the DMRS and the scheduled data are located on a partial subband, such as the above DMRS and the scheduled data are transmitted on different subbands in the same time slot.
上述标准针对第一时域资源的规定的允许承载DMRS的符号位置后续称为第一符号位置集合。The symbol position of the above-mentioned standard for the first time domain resource that is allowed to carry the DMRS is hereinafter referred to as the first symbol position set.
符号位置,符号索引,或者符号序号等所指含义实质相同。为描述方便,本文仅以符号位置为例,后文不赘述。The meanings of the symbol position, the symbol index, or the symbol number are substantially the same. For the convenience of description, the symbol position is taken as an example, and will not be described later.
相应的,参考图7c,在接收侧(gNB),Correspondingly, referring to Figure 7c, on the receiving side (gNB),
201c、接收信号201c, receiving signal
202c、根据gNB之前配置的UE上行传输资源内,基于UE LBT的结果(成功的时间),在一个或者多个小于1个时隙slot的时域资源上,根据允许的mini-slot的组合,处理所述接收的信号;所述允许的mini-slot组合中的DMRS所在的符号位置,记为第一符号位置集合。202c. According to the result of the UE LBT (successful time) in the UE uplink transmission resource configured before the gNB, according to the allowed mini-slot combination on one or more time domain resources of less than one slot slot. Processing the received signal; the symbol position of the DMRS in the allowed mini-slot combination is recorded as a first set of symbol positions.
可选的,所述方法还包括:在一个或者多个14符号的时域资源上,接收完整的slot或者其它的mini-slot的组合,所述其它的mini-slot的组合的DMRS所在符号位置记为第二符号位置集合。较优的,所述第二符号位置集合与所述第一符号位置集合不同,当然,也有可能相同。Optionally, the method further includes: receiving, on one or more 14-symbol time domain resources, a complete slot or a combination of other mini-slots, where the DMRSs of the other mini-slots are located Recorded as a second set of symbol locations. Preferably, the second set of symbol positions is different from the first set of symbol positions, and of course, may be the same.
可选的,所述方法还包括:在上行传输时隙中最后一个(或者位于末尾的)小于14符号的时域资源上,接收mini-slot的组合,所述“最后一个”mini-slot的组合的DMRS所在符号位置记为第三符号位置集合。较优的,所述第三符号位置集合与所述第一符号位置集合/第二符号位置集合均不同,当然,也有可能相同。Optionally, the method further includes: receiving a combination of mini-slots on the last (or at the end) time domain resource of less than 14 symbols in the uplink transmission time slot, where the "last" mini-slot The symbol position of the combined DMRS is recorded as a third symbol position set. Preferably, the third symbol position set is different from the first symbol position set/second symbol position set, and of course, may be the same.
以上行为例,例如gNB为接收侧,参考图7d,在该实施方式中包括:The above behavior example, for example, the gNB is the receiving side, and referring to FIG. 7d, the embodiment includes:
201d、在gNB为UE配置的上行传输时隙中的第一个slot中,如果UE LBT成功的时间位于该slot之内,即UE上行传输的起始位置相对于slot的边界小于14个符号时,gNB应在第一符号位置集合的各个符号上进行DMRS检测来确定UE发送PUSCH所使用的mini-slot组合。当UE上行传输的起始位置相对于slot的边界等于14个符号时,gNB应在第一符号位置集合和第二符号集合并集上的各个符号上进行DMRS检测来确定UE发送PUSCH所使用的mini-slot/slot组合;201d. In the first slot of the uplink transmission time slot configured by the gNB for the UE, if the UE LBT success time is within the slot, that is, when the start position of the uplink transmission of the UE is less than 14 symbols with respect to the slot boundary The gNB shall perform DMRS detection on each symbol of the first symbol position set to determine the mini-slot combination used by the UE to transmit the PUSCH. When the start position of the uplink transmission of the UE is equal to 14 symbols with respect to the slot, the gNB shall perform DMRS detection on each symbol on the first symbol position set and the second symbol set union to determine the UE used to transmit the PUSCH. Mini-slot/slot combination;
202d、在gNB为UE配置的上行传输时隙中的多个slot中,如果UELBT成功后的上行传输的起始位置到结束位置包含(跨越)两个以上的slot边界,gNB在上述第二时域资源前检测到DMRS时,会在上述第二时域资源的第二符号位置集合的各个符号上进行DMRS检测来确定UE发送PUSCH所使用的mini-slot组合;如果UELBT成功后的上行传输的结束位置相对于slot的边界小于14个符号时,gNB会在该slot的第一符号位置集合或第三符号位置集合的各个符号上进行DMRS检测来确定UE发送PUSCH所使用的mini-slot组合。具体的检测过程,一般的,在前述第一符号位置集合和/或前述第二符号位置集合并集的各个符号上,依次检测DMRS。202d. In a plurality of slots in the uplink transmission time slot configured by the gNB for the UE, if the start position to the end position of the uplink transmission after the UELBT succeeds includes (crosses) two or more slot boundaries, the gNB is in the second time. When the DMRS is detected before the domain resource, the DMRS detection is performed on each symbol of the second symbol position set of the second time domain resource to determine the mini-slot combination used by the UE to transmit the PUSCH; if the UELBT succeeds after the uplink transmission When the boundary of the end position relative to the slot is less than 14 symbols, the gNB performs DMRS detection on each symbol of the first symbol position set or the third symbol position set of the slot to determine the mini-slot combination used by the UE to transmit the PUSCH. In a specific detection process, generally, the DMRS is sequentially detected on each of the symbols of the first symbol position set and/or the second symbol position set.
以第一符号位置集合{1,3,7}及第二符号位置集合{0}及第三符号位置集合{0,2,6}为例(如图2所示),前述“依次检测”流程包括:Taking the first symbol position set {1, 3, 7} and the second symbol position set {0} and the third symbol position set {0, 2, 6} as an example (as shown in FIG. 2), the foregoing “sequential detection” The process includes:
具体的,对于第一时域资源的检测,(第一符号位置集合及第二符号位置集合的并集),gNB首先尝试在符号0检测DMRS,如果没有检测到控制信令,则会跳到符号1继续检测,如果符号1还没有检测到则跳到符号3检测,如果符号3上还没有检测到则跳到符号7再次检测,UE在其它符号不会盲检控制信令以节省能量。Specifically, for the detection of the first time domain resource, (the union of the first symbol location set and the second symbol location set), the gNB first attempts to detect the DMRS at symbol 0, and if no control signaling is detected, it will jump to The symbol 1 continues to detect, if the symbol 1 has not been detected, it jumps to the symbol 3 detection. If it has not been detected on the symbol 3, it jumps to the symbol 7 to detect again, and the UE does not blindly check the control signaling in other symbols to save energy.
具体的,对于第二时域资源的检测,不涉及第一符号位置集合,不需要在第一符号位置集合{1,3,7}上进行检测;可以按照相关标准进行检测(例如检测slot中的前1或2或者3个OFDM符号),或者采用本申请中其他实施方式中的第二符号位置集合进行检测。后续不再赘述。Specifically, for the detection of the second time domain resource, the first symbol position set is not involved, and the detection is not performed on the first symbol position set {1, 3, 7}; the detection may be performed according to relevant standards (for example, detecting the slot) The first 1 or 2 or 3 OFDM symbols are detected, or the second set of symbol positions in other embodiments of the present application are used for detection. I will not repeat them later.
具体的,对于第三时域资源的检测,不涉及第一符号位置集合和第二符号位置集合,不需要在上述符号位置集合上进行检测;可以按照相关标准例如符号位置{0,2,6}进行检测,或者采用本申请中其他实施方式中的第三符号位置集合进行检测。后续不再赘述。Specifically, for the detection of the third time domain resource, the first symbol position set and the second symbol position set are not involved, and the detection on the above symbol position set is not required; and the relevant standard, for example, the symbol position {0, 2, 6 Testing is performed or detected using a third set of symbol positions in other embodiments of the present application. I will not repeat them later.
前述的例子一中第二符号位置集合{0}为例,替换的,第二符号位置集合也可以有多个符号或其它符号位置,针对这些符号上的检测过程,与前述例子的符号0的检测过程类似,不再赘述。In the foregoing example 1, the second symbol position set {0} is taken as an example. Alternatively, the second symbol position set may also have multiple symbols or other symbol positions. For the detection process on these symbols, the symbol 0 of the foregoing example is used. The detection process is similar and will not be described again.
需要说明的是,第二符号位置集合和第一符号位置集合中不应具有公共的元素I。It should be noted that the second symbol position set and the first symbol position set should not have a common element I.
如前文所述,对于前述第二时域资源,不涉及第一符号位置集合,不需要在第一符号位置集合{1,3,7}上进行检测;可以按照相关标准进行检测,或者采用本申请中其他实施方式中的第二符号位置集合进行检测。如前文所述,对于前述第三时域资源,不涉及第一符号位置集合和第二符号位置集合,不需要在第一符号位置集合{1,3,7}和第二符号位置集合{0}上进行检测;可以按照相关标准进行检测,或者采用本申请中其他实施方式中的第三符号位置集合进行检测。这样,可以节省检测开销,UE可以减少功耗和延长工作时长。As described above, for the foregoing second time domain resource, the first symbol position set is not involved, and the detection is not performed on the first symbol position set {1, 3, 7}; the detection may be performed according to relevant standards, or The second set of symbol locations in other embodiments of the application is detected. As described above, for the foregoing third time domain resource, the first symbol position set and the second symbol position set are not involved, and the first symbol position set {1, 3, 7} and the second symbol position set {0 need not be needed. The detection is performed on the test; the detection may be performed according to relevant standards, or the third symbol position set in other embodiments in the present application may be used for detection. In this way, the detection overhead can be saved, and the UE can reduce power consumption and extend the working time.
下面通过多个方面或者实施例详细说明本申请提供的方案。The solution provided by the present application is described in detail below through various aspects or embodiments.
(一)COT起始或者末尾的非完整slot上的帧结构(1) Frame structure on the non-complete slot at the beginning or end of the COT
在步骤101c和102c,在非完整slot上发送的mini-slot组合中的各个mini-slot,遵循规定的mini-slot的结构。标准规定了mini-slot的可能的结构,比如,长度为2,4或者7;以及DMRS在各个mini-slot中的符号位置(例如DMRS始终位于mini-slot的第一个符号)。标准中还可以继续规定mini-slot的其他结构或者细节,不会影响本申请的实施。In steps 101c and 102c, each mini-slot in the mini-slot combination sent on the non-complete slot follows the structure of the specified mini-slot. The standard specifies the possible structure of the mini-slot, for example, the length is 2, 4 or 7; and the symbol position of the DMRS in each mini-slot (for example, the DMRS is always in the first symbol of the mini-slot). Other structures or details of the mini-slot may continue to be specified in the standard and will not affect the implementation of this application.
另外,各个实施方式中仅涉及时域上的帧结构,在频域上mini-slot和slot的发送方式不受限制。例如,DMRS可以仅位于mini-slot第一个符号的部分子带上。In addition, in each embodiment, only the frame structure in the time domain is involved, and the transmission manner of the mini-slot and the slot in the frequency domain is not limited. For example, the DMRS may be located only on a partial subband of the first symbol of the mini-slot.
在发送侧(例如UE侧),前述方法还可以包括:On the sending side (for example, the UE side), the foregoing method may further include:
100、可选的,UE在收到gNB配置的上行传输资源后,即可准备一个或者多个待发送的mini-slot,即生成并缓存一个或者多个mini-slot。这个步骤与LBT的过程可以并行的进行,或者其时间不受LBT的影响。只要在LBT成功时,有足够的mini-slot可以被发送,从而节省一定的通信等待时间。100. Optionally, after receiving the uplink transmission resource configured by the gNB, the UE may prepare one or more mini-slots to be sent, that is, generate and cache one or more mini-slots. This step can be performed in parallel with the LBT process, or its time is not affected by the LBT. As long as the LBT is successful, there are enough mini-slots to be sent, saving some communication waiting time.
为了实现高效的通信效率,在LBT成功后,应该采用一个或者多个mini-slot尽量填满LBT成功后以及第一个完整的slot开始前的所有符号位置,即第1个符号到第一个非完整slot结束时。具体的,可以采用后对齐的方式进行填满,可以最大限度的保证下 一个完整slot的结构的开始。所以,本申请实施方式提供了后对齐的可能(允许)的mini-slot组合,也就是说,规定了允许的DMRS符号位置。In order to achieve efficient communication efficiency, after the LBT is successful, one or more mini-slots should be used to fill all the symbol positions after the successful LBT and before the start of the first complete slot, ie the first symbol to the first one. At the end of the non-complete slot. Specifically, it can be filled in a post-alignment manner to maximize the start of the structure of the next complete slot. Therefore, embodiments of the present application provide a possible (allowed) mini-slot combination of post-alignment, that is, an allowed DMRS symbol position.
另外,在接收侧,较优的,根据预先配置,在第一符号位置集合和/或第二符号位置集合的并集中各个符号上,检测是否有DMRS。In addition, on the receiving side, preferably, according to the pre-configuration, whether there is a DMRS is detected on each of the first symbol position set and/or the second symbol position set.
具体的例子中,在接收侧,(例如gNB等基站)201c、在时隙中的符号0上检测是否有DMRS;In a specific example, on the receiving side, (for example, a base station such as gNB) 201c, detecting whether there is a DMRS on the symbol 0 in the slot;
202c、在符号0上没有检索到DMRS时,在小于1个时隙的时域资源中,至少在所述第一符号位置集合中的各个符号上检测是否有DMRS(202)。202c. When no DMRS is retrieved on symbol 0, in a time domain resource less than one time slot, whether there is a DMRS (202) is detected on at least each symbol in the first symbol position set.
在说明上述规定了允许的DMRS位置之前,先介绍非完整slot上各种可能的mini-slot组合以及相应的DMRS的符号位置(gNB应该至少检测的符号位置)。Before describing the above-specified allowed DMRS locations, the various possible mini-slot combinations on the non-complete slot and the symbol locations of the corresponding DMRSs (the symbol locations at which the gNB should be detected) are first described.
第一类mini-slot组合及应该至少检测的符号位置:The first type of mini-slot combination and the symbol position that should be detected at least:
当DMRS的序列生成与其所在的符号位置不相关,或者是DMRS序列生成与所在的符号位置相关且UE能力较强,UE可以实时根据LBT的状态来更新mini-slot中携带的DMRS,如UE在符号1检测到LBT失败,则会更新DMRS准备在符号3-6发送的4符号mini-slot,如果在符号3仍检测到LBT失败,UE会更新该mini-slot包含的DMRS,当UE直到符号10才检测到LBT成功时,UE可以发送包含已经更新的DMRS的4符号mini-slot。When the sequence of the DMRS is not related to the location of the symbol, or the DMRS sequence is related to the location of the symbol and the UE is strong, the UE can update the DMRS carried in the mini-slot according to the status of the LBT in real time, such as the UE. If the symbol 1 detects that the LBT fails, it will update the 4-symbol mini-slot that the DMRS is ready to send at symbol 3-6. If the LBT fails to be detected at symbol 3, the UE will update the DMRS contained in the mini-slot, when the UE reaches the symbol. 10 When it is detected that the LBT is successful, the UE can send a 4-symbol mini-slot containing the DMRS that has been updated.
当gNB给UE配置的上行传输时隙为一个或者多个完整的slot时,但UE在LBT成功后前述调度的时隙中发送的minislot组合称为第一类mini-slot组合。When the uplink transmission time slot configured by the gNB for the UE is one or more complete slots, the combination of the minislot sent by the UE in the previously scheduled time slot after the LBT succeeds is referred to as a first type of mini-slot combination.
图8a中白色符号代表此时LBT未通过,设备无法在该符号发送数据;斜线,横线,竖线分别代表不同长度的mini-slot。参考图8a,UE在slot内最多传输长度为2,4,7符号的mini-slot各1个,通信系统一共可支持7个不同符号起点的非完整slot调度(non-slot based scheduling)。采用上述方法进行非完整slot调度,gNB需要检测DMRS的符号位置集合所有可能性列举如下:The white symbol in Figure 8a represents that the LBT has not passed, and the device cannot send data in the symbol; the diagonal lines, horizontal lines, and vertical lines represent mini-slots of different lengths. Referring to FIG. 8a, the UE transmits up to one mini-slot each having a length of 2, 4, and 7 symbols in the slot, and the communication system can support a total of 7 non-slot based scheduling of different symbol starting points. Using the above method for non-complete slot scheduling, the gNB needs to detect the symbol location set of the DMRS. All possibilities are listed as follows:
1.通信系统中支持符号起点为1的非完整slot调度,通信系统在非完整slot内最多调度3个不同长度的mini-slot,用于进行上行发送:1. The communication system supports non-complete slot scheduling with the symbol starting point being 1. The communication system schedules up to three mini-slots of different lengths in the non-complete slot for uplink transmission:
UE发送一个2符号,一个4符号和一个7符号的mini-slot,gNB应该在符号{1,3,7}或{1,3,10}或{1,5,7}或{1,5,12}或{1,8,12}或{1,8,10},或者在上述符号的并集即符号{1,3,5,7,8,10,12}上进行DMRS检测(参考图2中选项1)。The UE sends a 2 symbol, a 4 symbol and a 7 symbol mini-slot, and the gNB should be at the symbol {1, 3, 7} or {1, 3, 10} or {1, 5, 7} or {1, 5 , 12} or {1,8,12} or {1,8,10}, or perform DMRS detection on the union of the above symbols, ie the symbols {1,3,5,7,8,10,12} (Reference Option 1) in Figure 2.
2.通信系统中支持在非完整slot内仅调度1个mini-slot,用于进行上行发送:2. The communication system supports scheduling only one mini-slot in a non-complete slot for uplink transmission:
UE发送一个2符号的mini-slot,gNB应该在符号{12}上进行DMRS检测(图8a中选项7);或者,The UE sends a 2-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB should perform DMRS detection on the symbol {12} (option 7 in Figure 8a); or,
UE发送一个4符号的mini-slot,gNB应该在符号{10}上进行DMRS检测(图8a中选项6);或者,The UE sends a 4-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB should perform DMRS detection on the symbol {10} (option 6 in Figure 8a); or,
UE发送一个7符号的mini-slot,gNB应该在符号{7}上进行DMRS检测(图8a中选项 4)。The UE sends a 7-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB should perform DMRS detection on the symbol {7} (option 4 in Figure 8a).
3.通信系统中支持在非完整slot内最多调度2个不同长度的mini-slot,用于进行上行发送3. The communication system supports scheduling up to two mini-slots of different lengths in a non-complete slot for uplink transmission.
UE发送一个4符号和一个7符号的mini-slot,gNB应该在符号{3,7}或{3,10}上进行DMRS检测,或者在上述两者的并集即符号{3,7,10}上检测DMRS(图8a中选项2);或者The UE sends a 4-symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB should perform DMRS detection on the symbol {3, 7} or {3, 10}, or in the union of the two, ie, the symbol {3, 7, 10 } Detect DMRS (option 2 in Figure 8a); or
UE发送一个2符号和一个7符号的mini-slot,gNB应该在符号{5,7}或{5,12}上进行DMRS检测,或者在上述两者的并集即符号{5,7,12}上检测DMRS(图8a中选项3);或者The UE sends a 2-symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB should perform DMRS detection on the symbol {5, 7} or {5, 12}, or the union of the above two, ie the symbol {5, 7, 12 } Detect DMRS (option 3 in Figure 8a); or
UE发送一个2符号和一个4符号的mini-slot,gNB应该在符号{8,10}或{8,12}上进行DMRS检测,或者在上述两者的并集即符号{8,10,12}上检测DMRS(图8a中选项5)。The UE sends a 2 symbol and a 4 symbol mini-slot. The gNB should perform DMRS detection on the symbol {8, 10} or {8, 12}, or the union of the above two symbols, ie, the symbol {8, 10, 12 } Detect DMRS (option 5 in Figure 8a).
第二类mini-slot组合及应该至少检测的符号位置:The second type of mini-slot combination and the symbol position that should be detected at least:
当DMRS的序列生成与其所在的符号位置相关时(即所在的符号位置作为DMRS序列的输入参数之一),且UE不能根据LBT的状态来实时更新mini-slot包含的DMRS,此时UE能支持的mini-slot的类型、数量和位置受限。例如,当持续时间为2符号的mini-slot的DMRS是根据符号1位置生成时,它只能在符号1-2发送。当UE只准备了在1,3,7符号开始发送的长度分别为2,4,7个符号的mini-slot各一份时,mini-slot对应的DMRS生成与符号位置1,3,7相关。When the sequence generation of the DMRS is related to the symbol position in which it is located (ie, the symbol position is one of the input parameters of the DMRS sequence), and the UE cannot update the DMRS included in the mini-slot in real time according to the state of the LBT, the UE can support the UE. The type, number and location of mini-slots are limited. For example, when a DMRS of a mini-slot with a duration of 2 symbols is generated according to the position of symbol 1, it can only be transmitted at symbol 1-2. When the UE only prepares one mini-slot of lengths of 2, 4, and 7 symbols that are transmitted at 1, 3, and 7 symbols, the DMRS generation corresponding to the mini-slot is related to the symbol positions 1, 3, and 7. .
当gNB给UE配置的上行传输时隙为一个或者多个完整的slot时,但UE在LBT成功后前述调度的时隙中发送的minislot组合称为第二类mini-slot组合。When the uplink transmission time slot configured by the gNB to the UE is one or more complete slots, the combination of the minislot sent by the UE in the previously scheduled time slot after the LBT succeeds is referred to as a second type of mini-slot combination.
此时根据LBT状态不同,UE的可能发送方式如下:At this time, according to the LBT status, the possible transmission manner of the UE is as follows:
1.通信系统中支持符号起点为1的非完整slot调度,通信系统在非完整slot内最多调度3个不同长度的mini-slot进行发送:1. The communication system supports non-complete slot scheduling with the symbol starting point being 1. The communication system schedules up to three mini-slots of different lengths for transmission in the non-complete slot:
UE发送一个2符号,一个4符号和一个7符号的mini-slot,gNB应该在符号{1,3,7}上进行DMRS检测(图8a中选项1)。The UE sends a 2 symbol, a 4 symbol and a 7 symbol mini-slot, and the gNB should perform DMRS detection on the symbol {1, 3, 7} (option 1 in Figure 8a).
2.通信系统中支持在非完整slot内调度1个mini-slot进行发送:2. The communication system supports scheduling one mini-slot for transmission in a non-complete slot:
UE发送一个7符号的mini-slot,gNB应该在符号{7}上进行DMRS检测(图8a中选项4)。The UE sends a 7-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB should perform DMRS detection on symbol {7} (option 4 in Figure 8a).
3.通信系统中支持在非完整slot内最多调度2个不同长度的mini-slot进行发送3. The communication system supports scheduling up to 2 mini-slots of different lengths for transmission in non-complete slots.
UE发送一个4符号和7符号的mini-slot,gNB应该在符号{3,7}上进行DMRS检测(图2中选项2)。The UE sends a 4-symbol and 7-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB should perform DMRS detection on the symbol {3, 7} (option 2 in Figure 2).
UE选择的mini-slot数目以及mini-slot长度可以由标准规定,也可以由gNB配置。当UE准备的2,4,7符号mini-slot预设发送位置不同时,例如UE先发送4符号的mini-slot,再发送2符号和7符号的mini-slot时,上述的DMRS符号检测位置会发生相应的变化,这里不再赘述。The number of mini-slots selected by the UE and the length of the mini-slot may be specified by the standard or configured by the gNB. When the 2, 4, 7 symbol mini-slot preset transmission positions prepared by the UE are different, for example, when the UE first transmits a 4-symbol mini-slot and then transmits a 2-symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot, the above DMRS symbol detection position Corresponding changes will occur, so I won't go into details here.
第三类mini-slot组合及在接收侧应该至少检测的符号位置:The third type of mini-slot combination and the symbol position that should be detected at least on the receiving side:
当DMRS的序列生成与其所在的符号位置不相关,或者是DMRS序列生成与所在的符号位置相关且UE能力较强时,UE可以实时根据LBT的状态来更新mini-slot中携带的DMRS。When the sequence of the DMRS is not related to the location of the symbol, or the DMRS sequence is related to the location of the symbol and the UE is strong, the UE can update the DMRS carried in the mini-slot according to the state of the LBT in real time.
当gNB给UE配置的上行传输时隙大于1个14符号的slot时,且在最后一个完整的时隙后还有长度为L,L小于14符号的非完整slot资源;或者,gNB给UE配置的上行传输时隙仅包含一个长度为L,L小于14符号的非完整slot资源(且该资源时域起始位置为完整slot资源的符号位置0)。UE在LBT成功后,在前述调度的L时隙内发送的minislot组合,称为第三类mini-slot组合。When the gNB configures the uplink transmission time slot of the UE to be larger than one 14-symbol slot, and after the last complete time slot, there is also a non-complete slot resource whose length is L and L is less than 14 symbols; or, the gNB configures the UE The uplink transmission time slot only contains a non-complete slot resource of length L and L less than 14 symbols (and the resource time domain start position is the symbol position 0 of the complete slot resource). After the LBT succeeds, the UE transmits the minislot combination in the scheduled L slot, which is called the third type mini-slot combination.
假设UE在slot内最多传输长度为2,4,7符号的mini-slot各1个,通信系统一共可支持7个持续不同时间的非完整slot调度(non-slot based scheduling)。通信系统采用下述方法进行非完整slot调度。It is assumed that the UE transmits up to one mini-slot of length 2, 4, and 7 symbols in the slot, and the communication system can support a total of seven non-slot based schedulings for different durations. The communication system uses the following method for non-complete slot scheduling.
gNB需要检测DMRS的符号位置集合所有可能性列举如下:The gNB needs to detect the symbol location set of the DMRS. All possibilities are listed below:
当最后一个非完整的slot调度持续13个符号时:When the last non-complete slot schedule lasts 13 symbols:
UE在符号0前LBT通过时,UE可以直接发送一个持续时间为13符号的非完整slot,其DMRS位于符号0。gNB在符号0上检测到DMRS即可知道UE发送了持续时间为13符号的非完整slot,此时UE也可以发送2+4+7符号mini-slot的组合,gNB可以通过检测符号2,6是否存在额外的DMRS来区分上述两种情况;When the UE passes the LBT before the symbol 0, the UE may directly send a non-complete slot with a duration of 13 symbols, and its DMRS is located at symbol 0. When the gNB detects the DMRS on symbol 0, it can know that the UE sends a non-complete slot with a duration of 13 symbols. At this time, the UE can also send a combination of 2+4+7 symbol mini-slot, and the gNB can pass the detection symbol 2,6. Whether there are additional DMRSs to distinguish between the above two cases;
如果UE在符号0时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号2前通过,UE可能从符号1或符号2起始发送一个4符号和一个7符号的mini-slot。gNB会从符号0开始在每个符号上进行DMRS检测,可能在符号{K,K+4}或{K,K+7}上检测到DMRS,K为UE进行mini-slot传输的起始符号位置;If the LBT fails when the UE is at symbol 0, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before symbol 2, the UE may start sending a 4-symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot starting from symbol 1 or symbol 2. The gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from the symbol 0, possibly detecting the DMRS on the symbol {K, K+4} or {K, K+7}, and K is the starting symbol for the mini-slot transmission of the UE. position;
如果UE在符号2LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号4前通过,UE可能从符号3或符号4起始发送一个2符号和一个7符号的mini-slot。gNB会从符号3开始在每个符号上进行DMRS检测,可能在符号{K,K+2}或{K,K+7}上检测到DMRS,K为UE进行mini-slot传输的起始符号位置;If the UE fails to pass the symbol 2LBT, the UE will continue to perform LBT listening. If the LBT passes before the symbol 4, the UE may start sending a 2 symbol and a 7 symbol mini-slot starting from symbol 3 or symbol 4. The gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 3, possibly detecting DMRS on the symbol {K, K+2} or {K, K+7}, and K is the starting symbol for mini-slot transmission of the UE. position;
如果UE在符号4LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号6前通过,UE可能从符号5或符号6发送一个7符号的mini-slot。gNB会从符号5开始在每个符号上进行DMRS检测,可能在符号{5}或{6}上检测到DMRS;If the UE fails the symbol 4LBT, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 6, the UE may send a 7-symbol mini-slot from symbol 5 or symbol 6. gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 5, possibly detecting DMRS on symbol {5} or {6};
如果UE在符号6LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号7前通过,UE可能从符号7起始发送一个2符号和一个4符号的mini-slot。gNB会从符号7开始在每个符号上进行DMRS检测,gNB可以在符号{7,9}或{7,11}上检测到DMRS;If the UE fails to pass the symbol 6LBT, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 7, the UE may send a 2 symbol and a 4 symbol mini-slot starting from the symbol 7. gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 7, and gNB can detect DMRS on symbol {7, 9} or {7, 11};
如果UE在符号7LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号9前通过,UE可能从符号8或符号9起始发送一个4符号的mini-slot。gNB会从符号8开始在每个符号上进行DMRS检测,可能在符号{8}或{9}上检测到DMRS;If the UE fails the symbol 7LBT, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 9, the UE may start sending a 4-symbol mini-slot from the symbol 8 or the symbol 9. gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 8, possibly detecting DMRS on symbol {8} or {9};
如果UE在符号9LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号11前通过,UE可能从符号10或符号11起始发送一个2符号的mini-slot,gNB会从符号10开 始在每个符号上进行DMRS检测,可能在符号{10}或{11}上检测到DMRS。If the UE fails to pass the symbol 9LBT, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 11, the UE may send a 2-symbol mini-slot starting from the symbol 10 or the symbol 11, and the gNB will start from the symbol 10. DMRS detection is performed on each symbol, and DMRS may be detected on the symbol {10} or {11}.
综上所述,gNB会首先在符号0检测到DMRS,如果检测成功,则UE发送了一个长度为13符号的非完整slot。如果在符号1或符号2检测到DMRS,则可以根据后续DMRS所在符号位置来判断UE发送的是4符号mini-slot+7符号mini-slot,还是7符号mini-slot+4符号mini-slot。当然,另一个例子中,也可以由标准固定各个不同mini-slot的发送顺序,例如根据mini-slot的大小的发送顺序,例如大的mini-slot先发,小的mini-slot后发,或者,小的mini-slot先发,大的mini-slot后发。其中,先发长度小的mini-slot可以进一步的利用时频资源,提高时频资源利用率。前述例子中,只要固定了mini-slot的发送顺序,在接收侧无需进行额外的DMRS检测。如果在符号3或符号4检测到DMRS,则UE发送了2符号mini-slot+7符号mini-slot。如果在符号5或符号6检测到DMRS,则UE发送了一个7符号mini-slot。如果在符号7检测到DMRS,则UE发送了2符号mini-slot+4符号mini-slot。如果在符号8或符号9检测到DMRS,则UE发送了一个4符号mini-slot。如果在符号10或符号11检测到DMRS,则UE发送了一个2符号mini-slot。In summary, the gNB will first detect the DMRS at symbol 0. If the detection is successful, the UE sends a non-complete slot with a length of 13 symbols. If DMRS is detected in symbol 1 or symbol 2, it can be determined according to the symbol position of the subsequent DMRS whether the UE sends a 4-symbol mini-slot+7 symbol mini-slot or a 7-symbol mini-slot+4 symbol mini-slot. Of course, in another example, the order of sending different mini-slots may also be fixed by the standard, for example, according to the order of sending mini-slots, such as a large mini-slot first, a small mini-slot, or Small mini-slots are issued first, and large mini-slots are issued. Among them, the mini-slot with small initial length can further utilize time-frequency resources and improve the utilization of time-frequency resources. In the foregoing example, as long as the transmission order of the mini-slot is fixed, no additional DMRS detection is required on the receiving side. If DMRS is detected at symbol 3 or symbol 4, the UE transmits a 2-symbol mini-slot+7 symbol mini-slot. If DMRS is detected at symbol 5 or symbol 6, the UE sends a 7-symbol mini-slot. If DMRS is detected at symbol 7, the UE transmits a 2-symbol mini-slot+4 symbol mini-slot. If DMRS is detected at symbol 8 or symbol 9, the UE sends a 4-symbol mini-slot. If DMRS is detected at symbol 10 or symbol 11, the UE transmits a 2-symbol mini-slot.
当最后一个非完整的slot调度持续L(L<13)个符号时:When the last non-complete slot schedule lasts for L (L < 13) symbols:
UE在符号0前LBT通过时,UE可以直接发送一个持续时间为L符号的非完整slot,其DMRS位于符号0。gNB在符号0上检测到DMRS,即可知道UE发送了持续时间为L符号的非完整slot;When the UE passes the LBT before the symbol 0, the UE may directly send a non-complete slot with a duration of L symbol, and its DMRS is located at symbol 0. The gNB detects the DMRS on symbol 0, and knows that the UE sends a non-complete slot with a duration of L symbol;
如果UE在符号0时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号(M=L-11,M>0)前通过,UE会发送一个4符号和一个7符号的mini-slot,gNB可以在符号{M,M+4}或{M,M+7},或者在上述符号的并集即符号{M,M+4,M+7}上进行DMRS检测;If the LBT fails when the UE is at symbol 0, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M=L-11, M>0), the UE will send a 4-symbol and a 7-symbol mini- Slot, gNB can perform DMRS detection on the symbol {M, M+4} or {M, M+7}, or on the union of the above symbols, ie, the symbols {M, M+4, M+7};
如果UE在符号0时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号(M=L-9,M>0)前通过,UE会发送一个2符号和一个7符号的mini-slot,gNB可以在符号{M,M+2}或{M,M+7},或者在上述符号的并集即符号{M,M+2,M+7}上进行DMRS检测;If the LBT fails when the UE is at symbol 0, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M=L-9, M>0), the UE will send a 2 symbol and a 7-symbol mini- Slot, gNB can perform DMRS detection on the symbol {M, M+2} or {M, M+7}, or on the union of the above symbols, ie, the symbols {M, M+2, M+7};
如果UE在符号0时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号(M=L-7,M>0)前通过,UE会发送一个7符号的mini-slot,gNB可以在符号{M}上进行DMRS检测;如果UE在符号0时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号(M=L-6,M>0)前通过,UE会发送一个2符号和一个4符号的mini-slot,gNB可以在符号{M,M+2}或{M,M+4},或者在上述符号的并集即符号{M,M+2,M+4}上进行DMRS检测;If the LBT fails when the UE is at symbol 0, the UE continues to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M=L-7, M>0), the UE sends a 7-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB can DMRS detection is performed on the symbol {M}; if the LBT fails when the UE is at symbol 0, the UE continues to perform LBT interception, and if the LBT passes before the symbol (M=L-6, M>0), the UE sends A 2 symbol and a 4 symbol mini-slot, gNB can be in the symbol {M, M+2} or {M, M+4}, or in the union of the above symbols, ie the symbol {M, M+2, M+ 4} perform DMRS detection;
如果UE在符号0时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号(M=L-4,M>0)前通过,UE会发送一个4符号的mini-slot,gNB可以在符号{M}上进行DMRS检测;如果UE在符号0时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号(M=L-2,M>0)前通过,UE会发送一个2符号的mini-slot,gNB可以在符号{M}上进行DMRS检测;If the LBT fails when the UE is at symbol 0, the UE continues to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M=L-4, M>0), the UE sends a 4-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB can DMRS detection is performed on the symbol {M}; if the LBT fails when the UE is at symbol 0, the UE continues to perform LBT interception, and if the LBT passes before the symbol (M=L-2, M>0), the UE transmits A 2-symbol mini-slot, gNB can perform DMRS detection on the symbol {M};
综上所述,gNB会在第三时域资源的上述符号集合检测DMRS,来判断UE实际发送的mini-slot或mini-slot组合。In summary, the gNB detects the DMRS in the above symbol set of the third time domain resource to determine the mini-slot or mini-slot combination actually sent by the UE.
第四类mini-slot组合及应该至少检测的符号位置:The fourth type of mini-slot combination and the symbol position that should be detected at least:
当DMRS的序列生成与其所在的符号位置相关且UE能力较弱时,UE无法实时根据LBT的状态来更新mini-slot中携带的DMRS。When the sequence generation of the DMRS is related to the location of the symbol and the UE capability is weak, the UE cannot update the DMRS carried in the mini-slot according to the state of the LBT in real time.
当gNB给UE配置的上行传输时隙大于1个14符号的slot时,且在最后一个完整的时隙后还有长度为L,L小于14符号的非完整slot资源;或者,gNB给UE配置的上行传输时隙仅包含一个长度为L,L小于14符号的非完整slot资源(且该资源时域起始位置为完整slot资源的符号位置0)。UE在LBT成功后,在前述调度的L时隙内发送的minislot组合,称为第四类mini-slot组合。When the gNB configures the uplink transmission time slot of the UE to be larger than one 14-symbol slot, and after the last complete time slot, there is also a non-complete slot resource whose length is L and L is less than 14 symbols; or, the gNB configures the UE The uplink transmission time slot only contains a non-complete slot resource of length L and L less than 14 symbols (and the resource time domain start position is the symbol position 0 of the complete slot resource). After the LBT succeeds, the UE transmits the minislot combination in the scheduled L slot, which is called the fourth type mini-slot combination.
可选的,可以约定UE在slot内最多传输长度为2,4,7符号的mini-slot各1个,UE先按照一定的顺序对长度为2,4,7符号的mini-slot进行发送,并按照各mini-slot所在的符号位置生成DMRS。UE采用上述方法进行非完整slot调度。Optionally, the UE may be configured to transmit a maximum of one, two, four, and seven symbols of the mini-slot in the slot, and the UE first sends the mini-slot with the length of 2, 4, and 7 symbols in a certain order. And generate DMRS according to the symbol position where each mini-slot is located. The UE uses the above method to perform non-complete slot scheduling.
gNB需要检测DMRS的符号位置集合所有可能性列举如下:The gNB needs to detect the symbol location set of the DMRS. All possibilities are listed below:
当最后一个非完整的slot调度持续13个符号时:When the last non-complete slot schedule lasts 13 symbols:
一个例子中,UE配置发送mini-slot的方式为先发2符号mini-slot,再发4符号mini-slot,最后发7符号mini-slot。In one example, the UE configures to send the mini-slot in the form of a 2-symbol mini-slot, a 4-symbol mini-slot, and a 7-symbol mini-slot.
UE在符号0前LBT通过时,UE可以直接发送一个持续时间为13符号的非完整slot,其DMRS位于符号0。gNB在符号0上检测到DMRS即可知道UE发送了持续时间为13符号的非完整slot或者是2+4+7符号的mini-slot组合。gNB可通过在符号2,符号6位置的DMRS检测来区分前述两者;When the UE passes the LBT before the symbol 0, the UE may directly send a non-complete slot with a duration of 13 symbols, and its DMRS is located at symbol 0. The gNB detects the DMRS on symbol 0 to know that the UE sends a non-complete slot with a duration of 13 symbols or a mini-slot combination of 2+4+7 symbols. gNB can distinguish between the two by DMRS detection at symbol 2, symbol 6 position;
如果UE在符号0时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号2前通过,UE会从符号2起始发送一个4符号和一个7符号的mini-slot。gNB会从符号0开始在每个符号上进行DMRS检测,可能在符号{2,6}上检测到DMRS;If the LBT fails when the UE is at symbol 0, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 2, the UE will send a 4-symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot starting from the symbol 2. gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 0, possibly detecting DMRS on symbol {2, 6};
如果UE在符号2LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号6前通过,UE会从符号6发送一个7符号的mini-slot。gNB会从符号2开始在每个符号上进行DMRS检测,可能在符号{6}上检测到DMRS;If the UE fails to pass the symbol 2LBT, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 6, the UE will send a 7-symbol mini-slot from the symbol 6. The gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 2, possibly detecting DMRS on symbol {6};
综上所述,gNB会首先在符号0检测到DMRS,如果检测成功,则UE发送了一个长度为13符号的非完整slot或2+4+7符号mini-slot的组合;如果在符号2检测到DMRS,则UE发送的是4符号mini-slot+7符号mini-slot;如果在符号6检测到DMRS,则UE发送了一个7符号mini-slot。以上给出的是UE配置的mini-slot为2+4+7时的发送机制和gNB检测方法。UE还可以采用其他的mini-slot发送配置,可以由标准给出或者由gNB对UE进行具体的配置。In summary, the gNB will first detect the DMRS at symbol 0. If the detection is successful, the UE sends a combination of a non-complete slot or a 2+4+7 symbol mini-slot of length 13; if detected at symbol 2 To the DMRS, the UE sends a 4-symbol mini-slot+7 symbol mini-slot; if the DMRS is detected at symbol 6, the UE sends a 7-symbol mini-slot. The above is the transmission mechanism and gNB detection method when the mini-slot configured by the UE is 2+4+7. The UE may also use other mini-slot transmission configurations, which may be given by the standard or configured by the gNB to the UE.
当最后一个非完整的slot调度持续L(L<13)个符号时:When the last non-complete slot schedule lasts for L (L < 13) symbols:
假设UE在slot内最多传输长度为2,4,7符号的mini-slot各1个,UE会先按照一定的顺序对长度为2,4,7符号的mini-slot进行发送,并按照各mini-slot所在的符号位置生成DMRS。It is assumed that the UE transmits up to one mini-slot of length 2, 4, and 7 symbols in the slot, and the UE first transmits the mini-slots of length 2, 4, and 7 symbols in a certain order, and according to each mini. The symbol position where -slot is located generates DMRS.
例如,当L为=12时,UE可以在该非完整slot内配置一个4符号的mini-slot和一个7符号的mini-slot。此时UE所有可能的mini-slot发送方式如下:For example, when L is =12, the UE can configure a 4-symbol mini-slot and a 7-symbol mini-slot in the non-complete slot. At this time, all possible mini-slot transmission methods of the UE are as follows:
UE在符号0前LBT通过时,UE可以直接发送一个持续时间为L符号的非完整slot,其DMRS位于符号0。gNB在符号0上检测到DMRS即可知道UE发送了持续时间为L符号的非完整slot;When the UE passes the LBT before the symbol 0, the UE may directly send a non-complete slot with a duration of L symbol, and its DMRS is located at symbol 0. The gNB detects the DMRS on symbol 0 to know that the UE sends a non-complete slot with a duration of L symbol;
如果UE在符号0时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号(M=L-11,M>0)前通过,此时UE事先配置好并发送一个4符号和一个7符号的mini-slot,gNB可以在符号{M,M+4}或{M,M+7}或者在上述符号的并集{M,M+4,M+7}上进行DMRS检测;If the LBT fails when the UE is at symbol 0, the UE continues to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M=L-11, M>0), the UE is configured in advance and sends a 4 symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot, gNB can perform DMRS detection on the symbol {M, M+4} or {M, M+7} or on the union {M, M+4, M+7} of the above symbols;
如果UE在符号0时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号(M=L-7,M>0)前通过,UE会发送一个7符号的mini-slot,gNB会从符号{L-10}可以在符号{M}上进行DMRS检测;If the LBT fails to pass the UE at symbol 0, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M=L-7, M>0), the UE will send a 7-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB will From the symbol {L-10}, DMRS detection can be performed on the symbol {M};
综上所述,gNB会根据的第三时域资源持续符号数来决定用于DMRS检测的符号位置集合检测,从而来判断UE实际发送的mini-slot或mini-slot组合。需要注意gNB会根据之前配置L的取值来确定上述步骤中可能的mini-slot配置(如准备mini-slot的数目及其持续时间)以及对应的DMRS检测符号位置集合,方法与上面的描述相同,在此不再赘述。此外,UE配置的mini-slot组合可以由gNB具体配置,也可以由标准给出。如UE配置了一个4符号mini-slot和7符号mini-slot时,gNB可以配置先发4符号再发7符号的mini-slot,也可以由标准给出此时UE只会先发送4符号mini-slot,再发送7符号mini-slot。In summary, the gNB determines the symbol location set detection for DMRS detection according to the third time domain resource persistent symbol number, thereby determining the mini-slot or mini-slot combination actually sent by the UE. It should be noted that the gNB will determine the possible mini-slot configurations (such as the number of mini-slots and their durations) and the corresponding DMRS detection symbol location set according to the value of the previous configuration L, in the same manner as described above. , will not repeat them here. In addition, the mini-slot combination configured by the UE may be specifically configured by the gNB or may be given by a standard. If the UE is configured with a 4-symbol mini-slot and a 7-symbol mini-slot, the gNB can be configured with a 4-signal and a 7-symbol mini-slot, or it can be given by the standard. The UE will only send the 4-symbol mini first. -slot, then send 7-symbol mini-slot.
第五类mini-slot组合及在接收侧应该至少检测的符号位置:The fifth type of mini-slot combination and the symbol position that should be detected at least on the receiving side:
当DMRS的序列生成与其所在的符号位置不相关,或者是DMRS序列生成与所在的符号位置相关且UE能力较强时,UE可以实时根据LBT的状态来更新mini-slot中携带的DMRS。When the sequence of the DMRS is not related to the location of the symbol, or the DMRS sequence is related to the location of the symbol and the UE is strong, the UE can update the DMRS carried in the mini-slot according to the state of the LBT in real time.
当gNB给UE配置的上行传输时隙大于1个14符号的slot时,且在第一个完整的时隙前还有长度为L,L小于14符号的非完整slot资源;或者,gNB给UE配置的上行传输时隙仅包含一个长度为L,L小于14符号的非完整slot资源(且该资源时域结束位置为完整slot资源的符号位置13)。UE在LBT成功后,在前述调度的L时隙内发送的minislot组合,称为第五类mini-slot组合。When the gNB configures the uplink transmission time slot of the UE to be larger than one 14-symbol slot, and before the first complete time slot, there is also a non-complete slot resource whose length is L and L is less than 14 symbols; or, gNB is given to the UE. The configured uplink transmission time slot only includes one non-complete slot resource whose length is L and L is less than 14 symbols (and the resource time domain end position is the symbol position 13 of the complete slot resource). After the LBT succeeds, the UE transmits the minislot combination in the scheduled L slot, which is called the fifth type mini-slot combination.
假设UE在slot内最多传输长度为2,4,7符号的mini-slot各1个,通信系统一共可支持7个持续不同时间的非完整slot调度(non-slot based scheduling)。通信系统采用下述方法进行非完整slot调度。It is assumed that the UE transmits up to one mini-slot of length 2, 4, and 7 symbols in the slot, and the communication system can support a total of seven non-slot based schedulings for different durations. The communication system uses the following method for non-complete slot scheduling.
gNB需要检测DMRS的符号位置集合所有可能性列举如下:The gNB needs to detect the symbol location set of the DMRS. All possibilities are listed below:
当第一个非完整的slot调度持续13个符号时:When the first non-complete slot schedule lasts 13 symbols:
UE在符号1前LBT通过时,UE可以直接发送一个持续时间为13符号的非完整slot,其DMRS位于符号1。gNB在符号0上检测到DMRS即可知道UE发送了持续时间为13符号的非完整slot,此时UE也可以发送2+4+7符号mini-slot的组合,gNB可以通过检测符号3,7是否存在额外的DMRS来区分上述两种情况;When the UE passes the LBT before the symbol 1, the UE can directly transmit a non-complete slot with a duration of 13 symbols, and its DMRS is located at symbol 1. When the gNB detects the DMRS on symbol 0, it can know that the UE sends a non-complete slot with a duration of 13 symbols. At this time, the UE can also send a combination of 2+4+7 symbol mini-slot, and the gNB can pass the detection symbol 3, 7. Whether there are additional DMRSs to distinguish between the above two cases;
如果UE在符号1时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号3前通过,UE可能从符号2或符号3起始发送一个4符号和一个7符号的mini-slot。gNB 会从符号1开始在每个符号上进行DMRS检测,可能在符号{K,K+4}或{K,K+7}上检测到DMRS,K为UE进行mini-slot传输的起始符号位置;If the LBT fails when the UE is at symbol 1, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before symbol 3, the UE may send a 4-symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot starting from symbol 2 or symbol 3. gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 1, possibly DMRS on symbol {K, K+4} or {K, K+7}, K is the starting symbol for mini-slot transmission of UE position;
如果UE在符号3LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号5前通过,UE可能从符号4或符号5起始发送一个2符号和一个7符号的mini-slot。gNB会从符号4开始在每个符号上进行DMRS检测,可能在符号{K,K+2}或{K,K+7}上检测到DMRS,K为UE进行mini-slot传输的起始符号位置;If the UE fails to pass the symbol 3LBT, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 5, the UE may start sending a 2 symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot from the symbol 4 or the symbol 5. The gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 4, possibly detecting DMRS on the symbol {K, K+2} or {K, K+7}, and K is the starting symbol for mini-slot transmission of the UE. position;
如果UE在符号5LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号7前通过,UE可能从符号6或符号7发送一个7符号的mini-slot。gNB会从符号5开始在每个符号上进行DMRS检测,可能在符号{6}或{7}上检测到DMRS;If the UE fails to pass the symbol 5LBT, the UE will continue to perform LBT listening. If the LBT passes before the symbol 7, the UE may send a 7-symbol mini-slot from symbol 6 or symbol 7. gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 5, possibly detecting DMRS on symbol {6} or {7};
如果UE在符号7LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号8前通过,UE可能从符号8起始发送一个2符号和一个4符号的mini-slot。gNB会从符号8开始在每个符号上进行DMRS检测,gNB可以在符号{8,10}或{8,12}上检测到DMRS;If the UE fails to pass the symbol 7LBT, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 8, the UE may send a 2 symbol and a 4 symbol mini-slot starting from the symbol 8. The gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from the symbol 8, and the gNB can detect the DMRS on the symbol {8, 10} or {8, 12};
如果UE在符号8LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号10前通过,UE可能从符号9或符号10起始发送一个4符号的mini-slot。gNB会从符号9开始在每个符号上进行DMRS检测,可能在符号{9}或{10}上检测到DMRS;If the UE fails to pass the symbol 8LBT, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 10, the UE may start sending a 4-symbol mini-slot from the symbol 9 or the symbol 10. The gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 9, and may detect DMRS on symbol {9} or {10};
如果UE在符号10LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号12前通过,UE可能从符号11或符号12起始发送一个2符号的mini-slot,gNB会从符号11开始在每个符号上进行DMRS检测,可能在符号{11}或{12}上检测到DMRS。If the UE fails to pass the symbol 10LBT, the UE will continue to perform LBT listening. If the LBT passes before the symbol 12, the UE may start sending a 2-symbol mini-slot from the symbol 11 or the symbol 12, and the gNB will start from the symbol 11 DMRS detection is performed on each symbol, and DMRS may be detected on the symbol {11} or {12}.
综上所述,gNB会首先在符号1检测到DMRS,如果检测成功,则UE发送了一个长度为13符号的非完整slot。如果在符号2或符号3检测到DMRS,则可以根据后续DMRS所在符号位置来判断UE发送的是4符号mini-slot+7符号mini-slot,还是7符号mini-slot+4符号mini-slot。当然,另一个例子中,也可以由标准固定各个不同mini-slot的发送顺序,例如根据mini-slot的大小的发送顺序,例如大的mini-slot先发,小的mini-slot后发,或者,小的mini-slot先发,大的mini-slot后发。其中,先发长度小的mini-slot可以进一步的利用时频资源,提高时频资源利用率。前述例子中,只要固定了mini-slot的发送顺序,在接收侧无需进行额外的DMRS检测。如果在符号4或符号5检测到DMRS,则UE发送了2符号mini-slot+7符号mini-slot。如果在符号6或符号7检测到DMRS,则UE发送了一个7符号mini-slot。如果在符号8检测到DMRS,则UE发送了2符号mini-slot+4符号mini-slot。如果在符号9或符号10检测到DMRS,则UE发送了一个4符号mini-slot。如果在符号11或符号12检测到DMRS,则UE发送了一个2符号mini-slot。In summary, the gNB will first detect the DMRS at symbol 1, and if the detection is successful, the UE sends a non-complete slot with a length of 13 symbols. If the DMRS is detected in the symbol 2 or the symbol 3, it can be determined according to the symbol position of the subsequent DMRS whether the UE transmits the 4-symbol mini-slot+7 symbol mini-slot or the 7-symbol mini-slot+4 symbol mini-slot. Of course, in another example, the order of sending different mini-slots may also be fixed by the standard, for example, according to the order of sending mini-slots, such as a large mini-slot first, a small mini-slot, or Small mini-slots are issued first, and large mini-slots are issued. Among them, the mini-slot with small initial length can further utilize time-frequency resources and improve the utilization of time-frequency resources. In the foregoing example, as long as the transmission order of the mini-slot is fixed, no additional DMRS detection is required on the receiving side. If DMRS is detected at symbol 4 or symbol 5, the UE transmits a 2-symbol mini-slot+7 symbol mini-slot. If DMRS is detected at symbol 6 or symbol 7, the UE sends a 7-symbol mini-slot. If DMRS is detected at symbol 8, the UE transmits a 2-symbol mini-slot+4 symbol mini-slot. If DMRS is detected at symbol 9 or symbol 10, the UE transmits a 4-symbol mini-slot. If DMRS is detected at symbol 11 or symbol 12, the UE transmits a 2-symbol mini-slot.
当第一个非完整的slot调度持续L(L<13)个符号时:When the first non-complete slot schedule lasts for L (L < 13) symbols:
UE在符号(14-L)前LBT通过时,UE可以直接发送一个持续时间为L符号的非完整slot,其DMRS位于符号(14-L)。gNB在符号(14-L)上检测到DMRS,即可知道UE发送了持续时间为L符号的非完整slot;When the UE passes the LBT before the symbol (14-L), the UE can directly transmit a non-complete slot with a duration of L symbol, and its DMRS is located at the symbol (14-L). The gNB detects the DMRS on the symbol (14-L), and knows that the UE sends a non-complete slot with a duration of L symbol;
如果UE在符号(14-L)时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号(M,14-L≤M,11≤L<13)前通过,UE会发送一个4符号和一个7符号的mini-slot, gNB可以在符号{M,M+4}或{M,M+7},或者在上述符号的并集即符号{M,M+4,M+7}上进行DMRS检测;If the LBT fails during the symbol (14-L), the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M, 14-L ≤ M, 11 ≤ L < 13), the UE will send a 4 Symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot, gNB can be in the symbol {M,M+4} or {M,M+7}, or in the union of the above symbols, ie the symbol {M,M+4,M+7} Perform DMRS detection on;
如果UE在符号3时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号(M,14-L≤M,9≤L<13)前通过,UE会发送一个2符号和一个7符号的mini-slot,gNB可以在符号{M,M+2}或{M,M+7},或者在上述符号的并集即符号{M,M+2,M+7}上进行DMRS检测;If the LBT fails when the UE is at symbol 3, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M, 14-L ≤ M, 9 ≤ L < 13), the UE will send a 2 symbol and a 7 The symbol's mini-slot, gNB can be DMRS detected on the symbol {M, M+2} or {M, M+7}, or on the union of the above symbols, ie the symbol {M, M+2, M+7} ;
如果UE在符号5时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号(M,7≤L<13)前通过,UE会发送一个7符号的mini-slot,gNB可以在符号{M}上进行DMRS检测;If the LBT fails when the UE is at symbol 5, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M, 7≤L<13), the UE will send a 7-symbol mini-slot, and the gNB can be in the symbol. DMRS detection on {M};
如果UE在符号(14-L)时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号(M,14-L≤M,6≤L<13)前通过,UE会发送一个2符号和一个4符号的mini-slot,gNB可以在符号{M,M+2}或{M,M+4},或者在上述符号的并集即符号{M,M+2,M+4}上进行DMRS检测;If the LBT fails during the symbol (14-L), the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M, 14-L ≤ M, 6 ≤ L < 13), the UE will send a 2 Symbol and a 4-symbol mini-slot, gNB can be in the symbol {M,M+2} or {M,M+4}, or in the union of the above symbols, ie the symbol {M,M+2,M+4} Perform DMRS detection on;
如果UE在符号(14-L)时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号(M,14-L≤M,4≤L<13)前通过,UE会发送一个4符号的mini-slot,gNB可以在符号{M}上进行DMRS检测;If the LBT fails during the symbol (14-L), the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M, 14-L ≤ M, 4 ≤ L < 13), the UE will send a 4 The symbol's mini-slot, gNB can perform DMRS detection on the symbol {M};
如果UE在符号(14-L)时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号(M,14-L≤M,2≤L<13)前通过,UE会发送一个2符号的mini-slot,gNB可以在符号{M}上进行DMRS检测;If the LBT fails during the symbol (14-L), the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M, 14-L ≤ M, 2 ≤ L < 13), the UE will send a 2 The symbol's mini-slot, gNB can perform DMRS detection on the symbol {M};
综上所述,gNB会在第三时域资源的上述符号集合检测DMRS,来判断UE实际发送的mini-slot或mini-slot组合。需要注意gNB会根据之前配置L的取值来确定从上述步骤的哪一步开始DMRS检测,如L=8,则gNB从步骤b开始检测DMRS;如果L=4,则gNB只会进行步骤e的DMRS检测。In summary, the gNB detects the DMRS in the above symbol set of the third time domain resource to determine the mini-slot or mini-slot combination actually sent by the UE. It should be noted that the gNB will determine which step of the above step to start the DMRS detection according to the value of the previous configuration L. If L=8, the gNB starts to detect the DMRS from step b; if L=4, the gNB only performs the step e. DMRS detection.
第六类mini-slot组合及应该至少检测的符号位置:The sixth type of mini-slot combination and the symbol position that should be detected at least:
当DMRS的序列生成与其所在的符号位置相关且UE能力较弱时,UE无法实时根据LBT的状态来更新mini-slot中携带的DMRS。当gNB给UE配置的上行传输时隙大于1个14符号的slot时,且在第一个完整的时隙前还有长度为L,L小于14符号的非完整slot资源;或者,gNB给UE配置的上行传输时隙仅包含一个长度为L,L小于14符号的非完整slot资源(且该资源时域结束位置为完整slot资源的符号位置13)。UE在LBT成功后,在前述调度的L时隙内发送的minislot组合,称为第六类mini-slot组合。When the sequence generation of the DMRS is related to the location of the symbol and the UE capability is weak, the UE cannot update the DMRS carried in the mini-slot according to the state of the LBT in real time. When the gNB configures the uplink transmission time slot of the UE to be larger than one 14-symbol slot, and before the first complete time slot, there is also a non-complete slot resource whose length is L and L is less than 14 symbols; or, gNB is given to the UE. The configured uplink transmission time slot only includes one non-complete slot resource whose length is L and L is less than 14 symbols (and the resource time domain end position is the symbol position 13 of the complete slot resource). After the LBT succeeds, the UE transmits the minislot combination in the scheduled L slot, which is called the sixth type mini-slot combination.
可选的,可以约定UE在slot内最多传输长度为2,4,7符号的mini-slot各1个,UE先按照一定的顺序对长度为2,4,7符号的mini-slot进行发送,并按照各mini-slot所在的符号位置生成DMRS。UE采用上述方法进行非完整slot调度。Optionally, the UE may be configured to transmit a maximum of one, two, four, and seven symbols of the mini-slot in the slot, and the UE first sends the mini-slot with the length of 2, 4, and 7 symbols in a certain order. And generate DMRS according to the symbol position where each mini-slot is located. The UE uses the above method to perform non-complete slot scheduling.
gNB需要检测DMRS的符号位置集合所有可能性列举如下:The gNB needs to detect the symbol location set of the DMRS. All possibilities are listed below:
当第一个非完整的slot调度持续13个符号时:When the first non-complete slot schedule lasts 13 symbols:
一个例子中,UE配置发送mini-slot的方式为先发2符号mini-slot,再发4符号mini-slot,最后发7符号mini-slot。In one example, the UE configures to send the mini-slot in the form of a 2-symbol mini-slot, a 4-symbol mini-slot, and a 7-symbol mini-slot.
UE在符号1前LBT通过时,UE可以直接发送一个持续时间为13符号的非完整slot,其DMRS位于符号1。gNB在符号1上检测到DMRS即可知道UE发送了持续时间为13符号的非完整slot或者是2+4+7符号的mini-slot组合。gNB可通过在符号3,符号7位置的DMRS检测来区分前述两者;When the UE passes the LBT before the symbol 1, the UE can directly transmit a non-complete slot with a duration of 13 symbols, and its DMRS is located at symbol 1. The gNB detects the DMRS on symbol 1 to know that the UE sends a non-complete slot with a duration of 13 symbols or a mini-slot combination of 2+4+7 symbols. gNB can distinguish between the two by DMRS detection at symbol 3, symbol 7 position;
如果UE在符号1时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号3前通过,UE会从符号3起始发送一个4符号和一个7符号的mini-slot。gNB会从符号1开始在每个符号上进行DMRS检测,可能在符号{3,7}上检测到DMRS;If the LBT fails when the UE is at symbol 1, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 3, the UE will send a 4-symbol and a 7-symbol mini-slot starting from the symbol 3. The gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 1, and may detect DMRS on symbol {3, 7};
如果UE在符号3LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号7前通过,UE会从符号7发送一个7符号的mini-slot。gNB会从符号3开始在每个符号上进行DMRS检测,可能在符号{7}上检测到DMRS;If the UE fails to pass the symbol 3LBT, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol 7, the UE will send a 7-symbol mini-slot from the symbol 7. The gNB will perform DMRS detection on each symbol starting from symbol 3, possibly detecting DMRS on symbol {7};
综上所述,gNB会首先在符号1检测到DMRS,如果检测成功,则UE发送了一个长度为13符号的非完整slot或2+4+7符号mini-slot的组合;如果在符号3检测到DMRS,则UE发送的是4符号mini-slot+7符号mini-slot;如果在符号7检测到DMRS,则UE发送了一个7符号mini-slot。以上给出的是UE配置的mini-slot为2+4+7时的发送机制和gNB检测方法。UE还可以采用其他的mini-slot发送配置,可以由标准给出或者由gNB对UE进行具体的配置。In summary, the gNB will first detect the DMRS at symbol 1, and if the detection is successful, the UE sends a combination of a non-complete slot or a 2+4+7 symbol mini-slot of length 13; if detected at symbol 3 To the DMRS, the UE sends a 4-symbol mini-slot+7 symbol mini-slot; if the DMRS is detected at symbol 7, the UE sends a 7-symbol mini-slot. The above is the transmission mechanism and gNB detection method when the mini-slot configured by the UE is 2+4+7. The UE may also use other mini-slot transmission configurations, which may be given by the standard or configured by the gNB to the UE.
当第一个非完整的slot调度持续L(L<13)个符号时:When the first non-complete slot schedule lasts for L (L < 13) symbols:
假设UE在slot内最多传输长度为2,4,7符号的mini-slot各1个,UE会先按照一定的顺序对长度为2,4,7符号的mini-slot进行发送,并按照各mini-slot所在的符号位置生成DMRS。It is assumed that the UE transmits up to one mini-slot of length 2, 4, and 7 symbols in the slot, and the UE first transmits the mini-slots of length 2, 4, and 7 symbols in a certain order, and according to each mini. The symbol position where -slot is located generates DMRS.
例如,当L为=12时,UE可以在该非完整slot内配置一个4符号的mini-slot和一个7符号的mini-slot。此时UE所有可能的mini-slot发送方式如下:For example, when L is =12, the UE can configure a 4-symbol mini-slot and a 7-symbol mini-slot in the non-complete slot. At this time, all possible mini-slot transmission methods of the UE are as follows:
UE在符号2前LBT通过时,UE可以直接发送一个持续时间为L符号的非完整slot,其DMRS位于符号2。gNB在符号2上检测到DMRS即可知道UE发送了持续时间为L符号的非完整slot;When the UE passes the LBT before the symbol 2, the UE may directly send a non-complete slot with a duration of L symbol, and its DMRS is located at symbol 2. The gNB detects the DMRS on symbol 2 to know that the UE sends a non-complete slot with a duration of L symbol;
如果UE在符号2时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号(M,14-L≤M,11≤L<13)前通过,此时UE事先配置好并发送一个4符号和一个7符号的mini-slot,gNB可以在符号{M,M+4}或{M,M+7}或者在上述符号的并集{M,M+4,M+7}上进行DMRS检测;If the LBT fails when the UE is at symbol 2, the UE continues to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M, 14-L ≤ M, 11 ≤ L < 13), the UE is configured in advance and sends a 4 symbols and a 7-symbol mini-slot, gNB can be performed on the symbol {M, M+4} or {M, M+7} or on the union of the above symbols {M, M+4, M+7} DMRS detection;
如果UE在符号2时LBT未通过,则UE会持续进行LBT侦听,如果LBT在符号(M,14-L≤M,9≤L<13)前通过,UE会发送一个7符号的mini-slot,gNB会在符号{M}上进行DMRS检测;If the LBT fails to pass the UE at symbol 2, the UE will continue to perform LBT interception. If the LBT passes before the symbol (M, 14-L ≤ M, 9 ≤ L < 13), the UE will send a 7-symbol mini- Slot, gNB will perform DMRS detection on the symbol {M};
综上所述,gNB会根据的第三时域资源持续符号数来决定用于DMRS检测的符号位置集合检测,从而来判断UE实际发送的mini-slot或mini-slot组合。需要注意gNB会根据之前配置L的取值来确定上述步骤中可能的mini-slot配置(如准备mini-slot的数目及其持续时间)以及对应的DMRS检测符号位置集合,方法与上面的描述相同,在此不再赘述。此外,UE配置的mini-slot组合可以由gNB具体配置,也可以由标准给出。如UE 配置了一个4符号mini-slot和7符号mini-slot时,gNB可以配置先发4符号再发7符号的mini-slot,也可以由标准给出此时UE只会先发送4符号mini-slot,再发送7符号mini-slot。In summary, the gNB determines the symbol location set detection for DMRS detection according to the third time domain resource persistent symbol number, thereby determining the mini-slot or mini-slot combination actually sent by the UE. It should be noted that the gNB will determine the possible mini-slot configurations (such as the number of mini-slots and their durations) and the corresponding DMRS detection symbol location set according to the value of the previous configuration L, in the same manner as described above. , will not repeat them here. In addition, the mini-slot combination configured by the UE may be specifically configured by the gNB or may be given by a standard. If the UE is configured with a 4-symbol mini-slot and a 7-symbol mini-slot, the gNB can be configured with a 4-signal and a 7-symbol mini-slot. It can also be given by the standard. The UE will only send the 4-symbol mini first. -slot, then send 7-symbol mini-slot.
进一步的,gNB给UE配置的上行传输完整/非完整slot中的前一个或多个(x个)符号可用于进行LBT,则上述第一/第二/第三/第四/第五/第六类minislot组合中的DMRS检测符号位置向后偏移x个符号,在此不再赘述。Further, the first one or more (x) symbols in the complete/non-complete slot of the uplink transmission configured by the gNB to the UE may be used to perform the LBT, and the first/second/third/fourth/fifth/first The DMRS detection symbol positions in the six types of minislot combinations are shifted backward by x symbols, and will not be described herein.
综上所述,UE根据LBT的结果以及gNB为该UE配置的上行时隙信息,以及标准规定的允许的mini-slot组合(例如规定第一符号位置集合),确定应该发送的mini-slot\slot组合。In summary, the UE determines the mini-slot to be sent according to the result of the LBT and the uplink time slot information configured by the gNB for the UE and the allowed mini-slot combination specified by the standard (for example, specifying the first set of symbol positions). Slot combination.
较优的,在另一个实施方式中,当UE能力较强,可以根据LBT结果实时更新minislot/slot携带的DMRS且UE会传输大于1个mini-slot/slot PUSCH时,可选的,UE可以只在允许发送的一个或者多个mini-slot/slot中的第一个mini-slot/slot上发送DMRS。这样可以进一步节省系统开销。此时,gNB可能无法根据DMRS来判断UE发送的mini-slot/slot顺序,但是,mini-slot/slot的发送顺序可以由gNB配置(如在RMSI/OSI中指示)或者由标准给出。Preferably, in another embodiment, when the capability of the UE is strong, the DMRS carried by the minislot/slot may be updated in real time according to the LBT result, and the UE may transmit more than one mini-slot/slot PUSCH, optionally, the UE may The DMRS is sent only on the first mini-slot/slot of one or more mini-slots/slots that are allowed to be sent. This can further save system overhead. At this time, the gNB may not be able to judge the mini-slot/slot order sent by the UE according to the DMRS, but the order of transmission of the mini-slot/slot may be configured by the gNB (as indicated in the RMSI/OSI) or by the standard.
当gNB给UE配置的上行资源只包含1个起始非完整slot时,gNB应根据UE能力按照上述第五/第六类minislot组合(即前述第一符号位置集合或其子集)进行DMRS检测来判断UE实际发送的mini-slot/slot组合;When the uplink resource configured by the gNB to the UE includes only one initial non-complete slot, the gNB shall perform DMRS detection according to the UE capability according to the fifth/sixth type minislot combination (ie, the foregoing first symbol position set or a subset thereof). To determine the mini-slot/slot combination that the UE actually sends;
当gNB给UE配置的上行资源只包含1个末尾非完整slot时,gNB应根据UE能力按照上述第三/第四类minislot组合(即前述第二符号位置集合和\或第三符号位置集合)进行DMRS检测来判断UE实际发送的mini-slot/slot组合;When the uplink resource configured by the gNB for the UE includes only one end non-complete slot, the gNB shall be combined according to the UE capability according to the third/fourth type minislot (ie, the foregoing second symbol position set and/or the third symbol position set). Perform DMRS detection to determine the mini-slot/slot combination actually sent by the UE;
当gNB给UE配置的上行资源包含1个起始非完整slot加上若干完整slot时,gNB应根据UE能力按照上述第五/第六类minislot组合(即前述第一符号位置集合或其子集)在起始非完整slot,按照上述第一/第二类minislot组合(前述第一符号位置集合和\或第二符号位置集合)在完整slot上进行DMRS检测来判断UE实际发送的mini-slot/slot组合;When the uplink resource configured by the gNB for the UE includes one initial non-complete slot plus a number of complete slots, the gNB shall be combined according to the UE capability according to the fifth/sixth type minislot (ie, the foregoing first symbol position set or a subset thereof). In the initial non-complete slot, the DMRS detection is performed on the complete slot according to the first/second type minislot combination (the aforementioned first symbol position set and/or the second symbol position set) to determine the mini-slot actually sent by the UE. /slot combination;
当gNB给UE配置的上行资源包含1个起始非完整slot加上若干完整slot加上末尾1个非完整slot时,gNB应根据UE能力按照上述第五/第六类minislot组合(即前述第一符号位置集合或其子集)在起始非完整slot,按照上述第一/第二类minislot组合(前述第一符号位置集合和\或第二符号位置集合)在完整slot上,按照上述第三/第四类minislot组合(即前述第二符号位置集合和\或第三符号位置集合)在末尾非完整slot上进行DMRS检测来判断UE实际发送的mini-slot/slot组合;When the gNB configures the uplink resource of the UE to include one initial non-complete slot plus a number of complete slots plus one non-complete slot at the end, the gNB shall be in accordance with the UE capability according to the fifth/sixth type minislot combination (ie, the foregoing a set of symbol positions or a subset thereof) in the initial non-complete slot, according to the first/second type minislot combination (the aforementioned first symbol position set and / or the second symbol position set) on the complete slot, according to the above The third/fourth type minislot combination (ie, the foregoing second symbol position set and/or the third symbol position set) performs DMRS detection on the last non-complete slot to determine the mini-slot/slot combination actually sent by the UE;
当gNB给UE配置的上行资源包含若干完整slot加上末尾1个非完整slot时,gNB 应根据UE能力按照上述第一/第二类minislot组合(前述第一符号位置集合和\或第二符号位置集合)在完整slot上,按照上述第三/第四类minislot组合(即前述第二符号位置集合和\或第三符号位置集合)在末尾非完整slot上进行DMRS检测来判断UE实际发送的mini-slot/slot组合;When the uplink resource configured by the gNB for the UE includes several complete slots plus one non-complete slot at the end, the gNB shall combine the first/second type minislot according to the UE capability (the aforementioned first symbol position set and/or the second symbol) Position set) on the complete slot, according to the third/fourth type minislot combination (ie, the foregoing second symbol position set and/or the third symbol position set), perform DMRS detection on the last non-complete slot to determine the actual transmission of the UE. Mini-slot/slot combination;
当gNB给UE配置的上行资源包含若干完整slot时,gNB应根据UE能力按照上述第一/第二类minislot组合(前述第一符号位置集合和\或第二符号位置集合)在完整slot上进行DMRS检测来判断UE实际发送的mini-slot/slot组合;When the uplink resource configured by the gNB to the UE includes several complete slots, the gNB shall perform the complete slot on the complete slot according to the UE capability according to the first/second type minislot combination (the foregoing first symbol position set and/or the second symbol position set). DMRS detection to determine the mini-slot/slot combination actually sent by the UE;
当gNB给UE配置的上行资源包含1个起始非完整slot加上末尾1个非完整slot时,gNB应根据UE能力按照上述第五/第六类minislot组合(即前述第一符号位置集合或其子集)在起始非完整slot,按照上述第三/第四类minislot组合(即前述第二符号位置集合和\或第三符号位置集合)在末尾非完整slot上进行DMRS检测来判断UE实际发送的mini-slot/slot组合。When the uplink resource configured by the gNB for the UE includes one initial non-complete slot plus one last non-complete slot, the gNB shall be according to the UE capability according to the fifth/sixth type minislot combination (ie, the foregoing first symbol position set or a subset thereof) in the initial non-complete slot, performing DMRS detection on the last non-complete slot according to the third/fourth type minislot combination (ie, the foregoing second symbol position set and/or the third symbol position set) to determine the UE The actual mini-slot/slot combination sent.
(二)关于第一符号位置集合(2) About the first symbol position set
基于(一)种可能的mini-slot组合,优选了其中部分,作为前述第一符号位置集合,标准可以规定其中的一种或者多种。在实施过程中会有所不同:Based on (a) possible mini-slot combinations, a portion thereof is preferred, and as the aforementioned first set of symbol positions, the standard may specify one or more of them. It will be different during the implementation process:
较优的,第一符号位置集合包括但不限于:Preferably, the first set of symbol locations includes but is not limited to:
例子1,{1,3,7}:Example 1, {1, 3, 7}:
仅可能在符号{1,3,7}上承载DMRS。即,接收侧可以只在3个符号上检测是否有DMRS,这3个符号是1,3,7。It is only possible to carry the DMRS on the symbol {1, 3, 7}. That is, the receiving side can detect whether there is a DMRS on only 3 symbols, and these 3 symbols are 1, 3, and 7.
例子2,{3,7}:Example 2, {3, 7}:
PUSCH仅可能在符号{3,7}上承载DMRS。The PUSCH may only carry the DMRS on the symbol {3, 7}.
例子3,{5,7}:Example 3, {5, 7}:
PUSCH仅可能在符号{5,7}上承载DMRS。The PUSCH may only carry DMRS on the symbol {5, 7}.
例子4,{8,10}:Example 4, {8, 10}:
PUSCH仅可能在符号{8,10}上承载DMRS。The PUSCH may only carry the DMRS on the symbol {8, 10}.
上述实施方式中,在LBT成功后的非完整slot上也承载需要发送的信息,可以高效的利用资源。另一方面,相对于在非完整slot中每个符号上都有可能承载DMRS的方案,通过规定可能承载DMRS的符号位置,可以简化发送的过程,相应的,可以简化接收侧的盲检PUSCH的复杂度。In the above embodiment, the information to be transmitted is also carried on the non-complete slot after the successful LBT, and the resource can be utilized efficiently. On the other hand, with respect to the scheme that the DMRS may be carried on each symbol in the non-complete slot, the transmission process can be simplified by specifying the symbol position that may carry the DMRS, and accordingly, the blind detection PUSCH of the receiving side can be simplified. the complexity.
(三)完整slot上的帧结构(3) Frame structure on the complete slot
前文101c-102c,101d-102d的方案中提到,LBT成功后的上行传输时隙中,可能包括一个或者多个完整slot长度的时域资源(14个符号)。完整14个符号可以采用已有的slot帧结构,也可以是多个mini-slot的组合。As mentioned in the schemes of the foregoing 101c-102c, 101d-102d, the uplink transmission time slot after the successful LBT may include one or more time domain resources (14 symbols) of the full slot length. The complete 14 symbols can be either an existing slot frame structure or a combination of multiple mini-slots.
较优的,在所述LBT成功后,还在一个或者多个完整slot的时域资源上发送其它DMRS和被所调度的PUSCH,所述DMRS所在的符号位置记为第二符号位置集合。所述第二符号位置集合与所述第一符号位置集合不同。Preferably, after the LBT succeeds, the other DMRS and the scheduled PUSCH are also sent on the time domain resources of the one or more complete slots, and the symbol position where the DMRS is located is recorded as the second symbol position set. The second set of symbol locations is different from the first set of symbol locations.
对于完整slot的PUSCH调度UE可以在符号0处发DMRS,其它位置是否发DMRS,以及DMRS数量均不确定。在gNB侧,至少应该在符号2处进行DMRS的检测。采用上述方案时,即第二符号位置集合仅有{0}。For a complete slot PUSCH scheduling UE may send DMRS at symbol 0, whether DMRS is sent at other locations, and the number of DMRSs is uncertain. On the gNB side, the detection of the DMRS should be performed at least at symbol 2. When the above scheme is adopted, the second symbol position set has only {0}.
本实施方式中的完整slot遵循上述规定,还有可能有进一步的优化实施方式,例如,标准可以进一步针对unlicensed频谱规定完整slot中允许的mini-slot的组合(mini-slot)。The complete slot in this embodiment follows the above provisions, and there may be further optimized implementations. For example, the standard may further specify a mini-slot of mini-slots allowed in the complete slot for the unlicensed spectrum.
例如,UE侧可以在完整的slot内使用2个7符号的mini-slot,即仅可能在符号{0,7}上承载DMRS。或者,可以在完整的slot内使用3个4符号和1个2符号的mini-slot,即仅可能在符号{0,7}或符号{0,2,6,10}上承载DMRS。相应的,在gNB侧,应该至少在符号{0,7}上或者符号{0,2,6,10}上进行DMRS检测。上述符号集合即前述针对完整slot的第二符号位置集合。For example, the UE side can use two 7-symbol mini-slots in the complete slot, ie it is only possible to carry the DMRS on the symbol {0, 7}. Alternatively, three 4 symbols and a 2 symbol mini-slot can be used in the complete slot, ie it is only possible to carry the DMRS on the symbol {0, 7} or the symbol {0, 2, 6, 10}. Correspondingly, on the gNB side, DMRS detection should be performed on at least the symbol {0, 7} or the symbol {0, 2, 6, 10}. The above set of symbols is the aforementioned second set of symbol positions for the complete slot.
较优的,可以限定上述第二符号位置集合中的1种,或者2种或者更多种。多种时,网络设备侧,也可以发送当前的第二符号位置集合的指示,以便于UE针对完整slot采用被指示的第二符号位置集合。Preferably, one of the above second symbol position sets or two or more types may be defined. In a plurality of cases, the network device side may also send an indication of the current second set of symbol positions, so that the UE adopts the indicated second set of symbol positions for the complete slot.
需要说明的是,为使方案清晰,无论是上行的传输,或者下行的传输,针对前述第一符号位置集合、第二符号位置集合(如果有)或者第三符号位置集合(如果有),可以在标准中定义前文所述位置集合的一种或者多种。如果是一种,不需要额外的指示;如果是多种,可能需要指示使用的位置集合。本文不限定其具体的指示方式。It should be noted that, in order to make the scheme clear, whether it is an uplink transmission or a downlink transmission, for the foregoing first symbol position set, the second symbol position set (if any) or the third symbol position set (if any), One or more of the set of locations described above are defined in the standard. If it is one, no additional instructions are required; if it is multiple, it may be necessary to indicate the set of locations to use. This article does not limit its specific instructions.
较优的,标准可以定义允许的mini-slot组合之外(可以是一种或者多种),标准可以进一步定义允许的发送各个mini-slot的顺序,可以是一种或者多种。较优的,约定一种发送mini-slot的顺序。例如,根据mini-slot的大小的发送顺序,例如长度大的mini-slot先发,长度小的mini-slot后发,或者,长度小的mini-slot先发,长度大的mini-slot后发。其中,先发长度小的mini-slot可以进一步的利用时频资源,提高时频资源利用率。固定的mini-slot顺序可以进一步简化接收侧的检测处理过程。各实施方式中,通过定义第一符号位置集合(如果有),第二符号位置集合(如果有)或者第三符号位置集合(如果有),参考图8和图8a,一方面定义了允许的mini-slot组合,另一方面定义了允许的mini-slot的顺序,从而提高了通信效率,简化了接收侧处理。Preferably, the standard may define an allowable mini-slot combination (which may be one or more), and the standard may further define the order in which the respective mini-slots are allowed to be transmitted, which may be one or more. Preferably, a sequence of sending mini-slots is agreed. For example, according to the order of sending mini-slots, for example, a mini-slot with a large length is sent first, a mini-slot with a small length is issued, or a mini-slot with a small length is issued first, and a mini-slot with a large length is issued. . Among them, the mini-slot with small initial length can further utilize time-frequency resources and improve the utilization of time-frequency resources. The fixed mini-slot sequence further simplifies the detection process on the receiving side. In various embodiments, by defining a first set of symbol locations (if any), a second set of symbol locations (if any) or a set of third symbol locations (if any), with reference to Figures 8 and 8a, on the one hand, the permissible The mini-slot combination, on the other hand, defines the order of allowed mini-slots, thereby improving communication efficiency and simplifying reception-side processing.
具体的,包括如下不同的方式:Specifically, it includes the following different ways:
101-1、标准仅定义一种第一符号位置集合(如果有)、第二符号位置集合(如果有)或者第三符号位置集合(如果有)。也就是说,mini-slot的可能的(允许的)组合只有一套。或者说,标准直接定义在第一时域资源中的允许的mini-slot的类型、数量和位置。也可以理解为,对于上行,定义了各个mini-slot的DMRS可能在第一时域资源所在的slot中的哪个符号位置上。对于下行,定义了控制信令可能在第一时域资源所在的slot中的哪个符号位置上。101-1. The standard defines only a first set of symbol locations (if any), a second set of symbol locations (if any), or a set of third symbol locations (if any). In other words, there is only one set of possible (allowed) combinations of mini-slots. Or, the standard directly defines the type, number, and location of allowed mini-slots in the first time domain resource. It can also be understood that, for the uplink, it is defined at which symbol position in the slot in which the first time domain resource is located in the DMRS of each mini-slot. For the downlink, it is defined at which symbol position in the slot in which the control signalling may be located in the slot in which the first time domain resource is located.
101-2、标准定义多种第一符号位置集合。也就是说,mini-slot的可能的(允许的)组合有多套。每个第一符号位置集合中,各个DMRS的可能的符号位置不完全相同。例如, 后文所述的例子1-例子7中的任意两个以上的符号位置集合。101-2. The standard defines a plurality of first symbol position sets. That is to say, there are multiple sets of possible (allowed) combinations of mini-slots. In each first set of symbol positions, the possible symbol positions of the respective DMRSs are not identical. For example, a set of any two or more symbol positions in Examples 1 to 7 described later.
具体的,101-2的方案中,gNB可以发送RRC或者其他信令,用于明示或者隐式的向UE指示当前网络使用的第一符号位置集合;以便于UE在当前网络使用的(配置的)符号位置上进行上行传输。每个第一符号位置集合可以有自己的索引index,或者采用位图的方式进行指示,或者采用其他的方式与其他信息进行复用。Specifically, in the solution of 101-2, the gNB may send RRC or other signaling, for explicitly or implicitly indicating to the UE, a first set of symbol locations used by the current network; so that the UE is used in the current network (configured ) Uplink transmission at the symbol position. Each first set of symbol positions may have its own index index, or may be indicated by means of a bitmap, or may be multiplexed with other information in other manners.
例如,用1个14比特的bitmap(比特位图)来指示,每个比特位对应于slot内的一个OFDM符号,比特位的值为“1”则表明UE在该符号位置需要进行DMRS盲检,置“0”表明UE在该符号位置不需要进行DMRS盲检,也可以反过来指示,置“0”表示UE在该符号位置需要进行DMRS盲检,置“1”表示UE在该符号位置不需要进行DMRS盲检。For example, a 14-bit bitmap is used to indicate that each bit corresponds to an OFDM symbol in the slot, and the value of the bit is "1", indicating that the UE needs to perform DMRS blind detection at the symbol position. "0" indicates that the UE does not need to perform DMRS blind detection at the symbol position, and may also indicate that the "0" is required to perform DMRS blind detection at the symbol position, and "1" indicates that the UE is at the symbol position. No DMRS blind inspection is required.
又例如,当第一符号位置集合有限时,如通信系统只支持在位置0上检测以外,在{3,7}或{3,7,10}两种符号位置集合时,只需要1比特就可以指示UE应使用的DMRS盲检配置。For another example, when the first symbol position set is limited, if the communication system only supports detection at position 0, when {3, 7} or {3, 7, 10} two symbol position sets, only 1 bit is needed. The DMRS blind check configuration that the UE should use can be indicated.
可选的,与前述各个实施方式不同的另一个实施方式中,在前述各个可能的mini slot或者slot上的第一OFDM符号上,仅允许进行LBT(不允许进行通信传输),这时,标准允许的的可以承载DMRS(上行)或者控制信令(下行)的位置可以是各个mini slot或者slot上的第二个OFDM符号(或者可能是第2-3个或者第2-4个OFDM符号)。这时,前述第一符号位置集合,第二符号位置集合或者第三符号位置集合将相应的去除不允许通信的OFDM符号位置,调整承载DMRS(上行)或者控制信令(下行)的OFDM符号位置。Optionally, in another implementation manner different from the foregoing various implementation manners, only LBT (transfer communication is not allowed) is allowed on the first OFDM symbol on each of the foregoing possible mini slots or slots. In this case, the standard The allowed location that can carry DMRS (uplink) or control signaling (downlink) can be the second OFDM symbol on each mini slot or slot (or possibly the 2-3th or 2-4th OFDM symbol) . At this time, the foregoing first symbol position set, the second symbol position set or the third symbol position set will correspondingly remove the OFDM symbol position that does not allow communication, and adjust the OFDM symbol position carrying DMRS (uplink) or control signaling (downlink). .
例如,前述第一符号位置集合{1,3,7}以及二符号位置集合{0}为例,如果采用第一个OFDM符号只能进行LBT的方案,则第一符号位置集合为{3,7},第二符号位置集合为{1}。其他例子不赘述。For example, the foregoing first symbol position set {1, 3, 7} and the two symbol position set {0} are taken as an example. If the LBT scheme can only be performed by using the first OFDM symbol, the first symbol position set is {3, 7}, the second symbol position set is {1}. Other examples are not described here.
另外,本发明实施例还提供了一种无线通信系统,所述无线通信系统可以是图1所示的无线通信系统100,也可以是图10所示的无线通信系统10,可包括:网络设备和终端。其中,所述终端可以是前述实施例中的终端,所述网络设备可以是前述实施例中的网络设备。具体的,所述终端可以是图2所示的终端300,所述网络设备可以是图3所示的网络设备400。所述终端也可以是图10所示的终端400,所示网络设备也可以是图10所示的网络设备500。关于所述网络和所述终端的具体实现可参考前述实施例,这里不再赘述。In addition, the embodiment of the present invention further provides a wireless communication system, which may be the wireless communication system 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the wireless communication system 10 shown in FIG. 10, which may include: a network device. And terminal. The terminal may be the terminal in the foregoing embodiment, and the network device may be the network device in the foregoing embodiment. Specifically, the terminal may be the terminal 300 shown in FIG. 2, and the network device may be the network device 400 shown in FIG. The terminal may also be the terminal 400 shown in FIG. 10, and the network device shown may also be the network device 500 shown in FIG. For specific implementations of the network and the terminal, reference may be made to the foregoing embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
以图2所示网络设备为例,网络设备处理器405用于控制发射器407在非授权频段和/或授权频段进行发送以及控制接收器409在非授权频段和/或授权频段进行接收。发射器407用于支持网络设备执行对数据和/或信令进行发射的过程。接收器409用于支持网络设备执行对数据和/或信令进行接收的过程。存储器405用于存储网络设备的程序代码和数据。Taking the network device shown in FIG. 2 as an example, the network device processor 405 is configured to control the transmitter 407 to transmit in an unlicensed band and/or a licensed band and control the receiver 409 to receive in an unlicensed band and/or a licensed band. Transmitter 407 is used to support the network device to perform the process of transmitting data and/or signaling. Receiver 409 is for supporting a network device to perform a process of receiving data and/or signaling. The memory 405 is used to store program codes and data of the network device.
具体的,发射器407可用于执行上述101a-102a,101b-102b,100,103;101c-102c,101d-102d,等等的方法。其他功能与工作流程参考前述各实施方式,此处不再赘述。。Specifically, the transmitter 407 can be used to perform the above methods 101a-102a, 101b-102b, 100, 103; 101c-102c, 101d-102d, and the like. For other functions and workflows, refer to the foregoing embodiments, and details are not described herein again. .
关于网络设备中各部件的具体实现,可参考图前述方法实施例,这里不再赘述。For the specific implementation of the components in the network device, reference may be made to the foregoing method embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
以图2所示终端为例,终端处理器304用于调用存储于所述存储器312中的指令来控制发射器306在非授权频段和/或授权频段进行发送以及控制接收器308在非授权频段和/或授权频段进行接收。发射器306用于支持终端执行对数据和/或信令进行发射的过程。接收器308用于支持终端执行对数据和/或信令进行接收的过程。存储器312用于存储终端的程序代码和数据。Taking the terminal shown in FIG. 2 as an example, the terminal processor 304 is configured to invoke an instruction stored in the memory 312 to control the transmitter 306 to transmit in an unlicensed band and/or a licensed band and control the receiver 308 in an unlicensed band. And/or licensed bands for reception. Transmitter 306 is used to support the terminal in performing the process of transmitting data and/or signaling. Receiver 308 is used to support the process by which the terminal performs reception of data and/or signaling. The memory 312 is used to store program codes and data of the terminal.
具体的,接收器308可用于201a-202a,201b-202b,200;201c-202c,201d-202d,等的方法。其他功能与工作流程参考前述各实施方式,此处不再赘述。Specifically, the receiver 308 can be used in the methods 201a-202a, 201b-202b, 200; 201c-202c, 201d-202d, and the like. For other functions and workflows, refer to the foregoing embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
具体的,发射器306可用于在监听到的空闲的频域资源上发送上行数据。Specifically, the transmitter 306 can be configured to send uplink data on the monitored idle frequency domain resources.
关于终端中各部件的具体实现,可参考图前述方法实施例,这里不再赘述。For the specific implementation of the components in the terminal, reference may be made to the foregoing method embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
本领域技术人员可以理解,可以对实施方式中的各个功能模块进行不同的划分,不影响产品其实现。例如,可以划分出LBT模块,用于实现图4A和\或4B的LBT功能,可以划分数据准备模块,用于生成缓存mini-slot;可以划分不同的发送模块,分别用于CORESET和数据的发送;接收模块,分别用于CORESET和数据的接收。而在产品中,上述模块很可能是集成在软硬件中,例如处理器或者集成电路。Those skilled in the art can understand that each functional module in the embodiment can be divided differently without affecting the implementation of the product. For example, the LBT module can be divided to implement the LBT function of FIG. 4A and/or 4B, and the data preparation module can be divided to generate a cache mini-slot; different transmission modules can be divided for CORESET and data transmission respectively. Receive module for CORESET and data reception. In the product, the above modules are likely to be integrated in hardware and software, such as processors or integrated circuits.
结合本发明实施例公开内容所描述的方法或者算法的步骤可以硬件的方式来实现,也可以是由处理器执行软件指令的方式来实现。软件指令可以由相应的软件模块组成,软件模块可以被存放于RAM、闪存、ROM、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable Programmable ROM,EPROM)、电可擦可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM,EEPROM)、寄存器、硬盘、移动硬盘、只读光盘(CD-ROM)或者本领域熟知的任何其他形式的存储介质中。一种示例性的存储介质耦合至处理器,从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息,且可向该存储介质写入信息。当然,存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC中。另外,该ASIC可以位于收发机或中继设备中。当然,处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于无线接入网设备或终端设备中。The steps of the method or algorithm described in connection with the disclosure of the embodiments of the present invention may be implemented in a hardware manner, or may be implemented by a processor executing software instructions. The software instructions may be composed of corresponding software modules, which may be stored in RAM, flash memory, ROM, Erasable Programmable ROM (EPROM), and electrically erasable programmable read only memory (Electrically EPROM). EEPROM), registers, hard disk, removable hard disk, compact disk read only (CD-ROM) or any other form of storage medium known in the art. An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor to enable the processor to read information from, and write information to, the storage medium. Of course, the storage medium can also be an integral part of the processor. The processor and the storage medium can be located in an ASIC. Additionally, the ASIC can be located in a transceiver or relay device. Of course, the processor and the storage medium may also exist as discrete components in the radio access network device or the terminal device.
本领域技术人员应该可以意识到,在上述一个或多个示例中,本发明实施例所描述的功能可以用硬件、软件、固件或它们的任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以将这些功能存储在计算机可读介质中或者作为计算机可读介质上的一个或多个指令或代码进行传输。计算机可读介质包括计算机存储介质和通信介质,其中通信介质包括便于从一个地方向另一个地方传送计算机程序的任何介质。存储介质可以是通用或专用计算机能够存取的任何可用介质。Those skilled in the art should appreciate that in one or more of the above examples, the functions described in the embodiments of the present invention may be implemented in hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof. When implemented in software, the functions may be stored in a computer readable medium or transmitted as one or more instructions or code on a computer readable medium. Computer readable media includes both computer storage media and communication media including any medium that facilitates transfer of a computer program from one location to another. A storage medium may be any available media that can be accessed by a general purpose or special purpose computer.
以上的具体实施方式,对本发明实施例的目的、技术方案和有益效果进行了进一步详细说明,所应理解的是,以上仅为本发明实施例的具体实施方式而已,并不用于限定本发明实施例的保护范围,凡在本发明实施例的技术方案的基础之上,所做的任何修改、等同替换、改进等,均应包括在本发明实施例的保护范围之内。The specific embodiments of the present invention have been described in detail with reference to the embodiments of the present invention. The scope of the present invention is to be construed as being limited to the scope of the embodiments of the present invention.

Claims (28)

  1. 一种信号传输方法,其特征在于,包括:A signal transmission method, comprising:
    进行LBT;Conduct LBT;
    在LBT成功后,在一个或者多个小于1个时隙slot的时域资源上,发送允许的微时隙mini-slot的组合;所述允许的mini-slot组合中的各个mini-slot的起始的符号位置,记为第一符号位置集合;所述mini-slot的组合包括一个或者多个mini-slot。After the LBT succeeds, transmitting a combination of allowed minislot mini-slots on one or more time domain resources of less than 1 slot slot; starting from each mini-slot in the allowed mini-slot combination The initial symbol position is recorded as a first symbol position set; the mini-slot combination includes one or more mini-slots.
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,所述各个mini-slot中包括承载控制信令的控制资源集CORESET,所述控制信令包括:第一公共控制信令,所述第一公共控制信令用于指示最大信道占用时间MCOT或者信道占用时间COT的配置信息;The method according to claim 1, wherein each of the mini-slots includes a control resource set CORESET carrying control signaling, the control signaling comprising: first common control signaling, the first common control signaling The configuration information indicating the maximum channel occupation time MCOT or the channel occupation time COT;
    或者,所述各个mini-slot中的一个或者多个符号位置上承载解调参考信号DMRS。Alternatively, the demodulation reference signal DMRS is carried on one or more symbol positions in the respective mini-slots.
  3. 根据权利要求1或者2所述的方法,The method according to claim 1 or 2,
    所述第一符号位置集合是下述符号位置集合中的一个或者多个:The first set of symbol locations is one or more of the following set of symbol locations:
    {1,3,7},{3,7,10},{3,7},{7,10},{5,7,12},{5,7},{7,12}。{1,3,7},{3,7,10},{3,7},{7,10},{5,7,12},{5,7},{7,12}.
  4. 根据权利要求1或者2所述的方法,The method according to claim 1 or 2,
    所述第一符号位置集合为多个;The first set of symbol positions is a plurality of;
    所述方法还包括:发送当前使用的所述第一符号位置集合的指示。The method also includes transmitting an indication of the first set of first set of symbol locations currently in use.
  5. 根据权利要求1所述的方法,所述方法还包括The method of claim 1 further comprising
    在所述LBT成功后,还在一个或者多个14个符号的时域资源上发送:完整的slot或者其它的mini-slot的组合,所述其它的mini-slot的组合的各个mini-slot的起始符号位置记为第二符号位置集合;所述第二符号位置集合与所述第一符号位置集合不同。After the LBT is successful, it is also sent on one or more 14-symbol time domain resources: a complete slot or a combination of other mini-slots, the other mini-slot combinations of the respective mini-slots The starting symbol position is recorded as a second set of symbol positions; the second set of symbol positions is different from the first set of symbol positions.
  6. 根据权利要求1或2所述的方法,所述方法还包括:发送最大信道占用时间MCOT的起始位置的指示。The method according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising: transmitting an indication of a starting position of the maximum channel occupation time MCOT.
  7. 一种信号接收方法,其特征在于,包括A signal receiving method, characterized in that it comprises
    接收信号;至少在一个或者多个小于1个时隙slot的时域资源上,根据允许的mini-slot的组合,处理接收信号;所述允许的mini-slot的组合包括一个或者多个mini-slot;所述允许的mini-slot组合中的各个mini-slot的起始的符号位置,记为第一符号位置集合。Receiving a signal; processing the received signal according to a combination of allowed mini-slots on at least one or more time domain resources of less than 1 slot slot; the allowed combination of mini-slots includes one or more mini- Slot; the initial symbol position of each mini-slot in the allowed mini-slot combination, denoted as the first set of symbol positions.
  8. 根据权利要求7所述的方法,The method of claim 7
    所述第一符号位置集合是下述符号位置集合中的一个或者多个:The first set of symbol locations is one or more of the following set of symbol locations:
    {1,3,7},{3,7,10},{3,7},{7,10},{5,7,12},{5,7},{7,12}。{1,3,7},{3,7,10},{3,7},{7,10},{5,7,12},{5,7},{7,12}.
  9. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法,A method according to claim 7 or 8,
    所述第一符号位置集合为多个;The first set of symbol positions is a plurality of;
    所述方法还包括:接收当前使用的第一符号位置集合的指示。The method also includes receiving an indication of the currently used first set of symbol locations.
  10. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 7 or 8, the method further comprising:
    在一个或者多个14符号的时域资源上,接收完整的slot或者或者其它的mini-slot的组合,所述其它的mini-slot的组合的各个mini-slot的起始符号位置记为第二符号位置集合;所述第二符号位置集合与所述第一符号位置集合不同。Receiving a complete slot or other combination of mini-slots on one or more 14-symbol time domain resources, the starting symbol positions of the respective mini-slots of the other mini-slot combinations are recorded as the second a set of symbol locations; the second set of symbol locations being different from the first set of symbol locations.
  11. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法,所述方法还包括:接收最大信道占用时间MCOT或者信道占用时间COT的起始位置的指示。The method according to claim 7 or 8, further comprising receiving an indication of a maximum channel occupancy time MCOT or a start position of a channel occupation time COT.
  12. 根据权利要求7或8所述的方法,所述信号为下行信号,所述处理所述接收的信号包括:The method according to claim 7 or 8, wherein the signal is a downlink signal, and the processing the received signal comprises:
    在时隙中的符号0或者0,1或者0,1和2上检测是否有控制信令;(201b)Detecting whether there is control signaling on symbol 0 or 0, 1 or 0, 1 and 2 in the slot; (201b)
    在符号0或者符号0,1或者符号0,1和2上没有检索到所述控制信令时,在小于1个时隙的时域资源中,至少在所述第一符号位置集合中的各个符号起的连续n个符号上检测是否有控制信令(202),n为1或者2或者3(202b),以确定接收到的mini-slot的组合。When the control signaling is not retrieved on symbol 0 or symbol 0, 1 or symbols 0, 1 and 2, in at least one time slot resource, at least in the first symbol position set Whether there is control signaling (202) on consecutive n symbols from the symbol, n is 1 or 2 or 3 (202b) to determine the combination of the received mini-slots.
  13. 根据权利要求7或者8所述的方法,所述信号为上行信号,所述处理接收的信号包括:The method according to claim 7 or 8, wherein the signal is an uplink signal, and the signal received by the processing comprises:
    在所述第一符号位置集合的各个符号上,依次检测解调参考信号DMRS。The demodulation reference signal DMRS is sequentially detected on each symbol of the first symbol position set.
  14. 根据权利要求10所述的方法,所述信号为上行信号,所述处理接收的信号包括:The method according to claim 10, wherein the signal is an uplink signal, and the signal received by the processing comprises:
    在所述第一符号位置集合和所述第二符号位置集合并集的各个符号上,依次检测解调参考信号DMRS,以确定接收到的mini-slot的组合。On each of the symbols of the first set of symbol positions and the second set of symbol positions, the demodulation reference signal DMRS is sequentially detected to determine a combination of the received mini-slots.
  15. 一种信号传输装置,其特征在于,包括:A signal transmission device, comprising:
    第一模块,用于进行LBT;a first module for performing LBT;
    第二模块,用于在LBT成功后,在一个或者多个小于1个时隙slot的时域资源上,发送允许的mini-slot的组合;所述允许的mini-slot的组合包括一个或者多个mini-slot;所述允许的mini-slot组合中的各个mini-slot的起始的符号位置,记为第一符号位置集合。a second module, configured to send a combination of allowed mini-slots on one or more time domain resources of less than one slot slot after the LBT succeeds; the allowed mini-slot combination includes one or more Mini-slot; the starting symbol position of each mini-slot in the allowed mini-slot combination, recorded as the first set of symbol positions.
  16. 根据权利要求13所述的装置,所述各个mini-slot中包括承载控制信令的控制资源集CORESET,所述控制信令包括:第一公共控制信令,所述第一公共控制信令用于指示MCOT的配置信息;The apparatus according to claim 13, wherein each of the mini-slots includes a control resource set CORESET carrying control signaling, the control signaling comprising: first common control signaling, the first common control signaling Instructing the configuration information of the MCOT;
    或者,所述各个mini-slot中的一个或者多个符号位置上承载解调参考信号DMRS。Alternatively, the demodulation reference signal DMRS is carried on one or more symbol positions in the respective mini-slots.
  17. 根据权利要求15或者16所述的装置,A device according to claim 15 or 16,
    所述第一符号位置集合是下述符号位置集合中的一个或者多个:The first set of symbol locations is one or more of the following set of symbol locations:
    {1,3,7},{3,7,10},{3,7},{7,10},{5,7,12},{5,7},{7,12}。{1,3,7},{3,7,10},{3,7},{7,10},{5,7,12},{5,7},{7,12}.
  18. 根据权利要求15或者16所述的装置,A device according to claim 15 or 16,
    所述第一符号位置集合为多个;The first set of symbol positions is a plurality of;
    所述装置还包括:发送当前使用的所述第一符号位置集合的指示。The apparatus also includes transmitting an indication of the first set of symbol locations currently in use.
  19. 根据权利要求14所述的装置,所述装置还包括The device of claim 14 further comprising
    第三模块,用于在所述LBT成功后,还在一个或者多个14个符号的时域资源上发送:完整的slot或者其它的mini-slot的组合,所述其它的mini-slot的组合的各个mini-slot的起始符号位置记为第二符号位置集合;所述第二符号位置集合与所述第一符号位置集合不同。a third module, configured to send, on the time domain resource of one or more 14 symbols, after the success of the LBT: a complete slot or a combination of other mini-slots, the combination of the other mini-slots The starting symbol position of each mini-slot is recorded as a second set of symbol positions; the second set of symbol positions is different from the first set of symbol positions.
  20. 根据权利要求15或16所述的装置,所述装置还包括:第四模块,用于发送最 大信道占用时间MCOT或者信道占用时间COT的起始位置的指示。The apparatus according to claim 15 or 16, further comprising: a fourth module for transmitting an indication of a maximum channel occupation time MCOT or a start position of the channel occupation time COT.
  21. 一种信号接收装置,其特征在于,包括A signal receiving device, characterized by comprising
    第一模块,用于接收信号;a first module for receiving a signal;
    第二模块,用于至少在一个或者多个小于1个时隙slot的时域资源上,根据允许的mini-slot的组合,处理接收信号;所述允许的mini-slot的组合包括一个或者多个mini-slot;所述允许的mini-slot组合中的各个mini-slot的起始的符号位置,记为第一符号位置集合。a second module, configured to process a received signal according to a combination of allowed mini-slots on at least one or more time domain resources of less than one slot slot; the allowed mini-slot combination includes one or more Mini-slot; the starting symbol position of each mini-slot in the allowed mini-slot combination, recorded as the first set of symbol positions.
  22. 根据权利要求21所述的装置,The device according to claim 21,
    所述第一符号位置集合是下述符号位置集合中的一个或者多个:The first set of symbol locations is one or more of the following set of symbol locations:
    {1,3,7},{3,7,10},{3,7},{7,10},{5,7,12},{5,7},{7,12}。{1,3,7},{3,7,10},{3,7},{7,10},{5,7,12},{5,7},{7,12}.
  23. 根据权利要求21或22所述的装置,A device according to claim 21 or 22,
    所述第一符号位置集合为多个;The first set of symbol positions is a plurality of;
    所述装置还包括:接收当前使用的第一符号位置集合的指示。The apparatus also includes receiving an indication of the first set of symbol locations currently in use.
  24. 根据权利要求21或22所述的装置,所述装置还包括:The device according to claim 21 or 22, further comprising:
    第三模块,用于在一个或者多个14符号的时域资源上,接收完整的slot或者或者其它的mini-slot的组合,所述其它的mini-slot的组合的各个mini-slot的起始符号位置记为第二符号位置集合;所述第二符号位置集合与所述第一符号位置集合不同。a third module for receiving a complete slot or other combination of mini-slots on one or more 14-symbol time domain resources, the start of each mini-slot of the combination of the other mini-slots The symbol position is recorded as a second set of symbol positions; the second set of symbol positions is different from the first set of symbol positions.
  25. 根据权利要求21或22所述的装置,所述装置还包括:第四模块,用于接收最大信道占用时间MCOT或者信道占用时间COT的起始位置的指示。The apparatus according to claim 21 or 22, further comprising: a fourth module, configured to receive an indication of a maximum channel occupation time MCOT or a start position of a channel occupation time COT.
  26. 根据权利要求21或22所述的装置,所述信号为下行信号,所述第二模块具体用于:The device according to claim 21 or 22, wherein the signal is a downlink signal, and the second module is specifically configured to:
    在时隙中的符号0或者0,1或者0,1和2上检测是否有控制信令;(201)Detecting whether there is control signaling on symbol 0 or 0, 1 or 0, 1 and 2 in the slot; (201)
    在符号0或者符号0,1或者符号0,1和2上没有检索到所述控制信令时,在小于1个时隙的时域资源中,至少在所述第一符号位置集合中的各个符号起的连续n个符号上检测是否有控制信令(202),n为1或者2或者3,以确定接收到的mini-slot的组合。When the control signaling is not retrieved on symbol 0 or symbol 0, 1 or symbols 0, 1 and 2, in at least one time slot resource, at least in the first symbol position set Whether there is control signaling (202) on consecutive n symbols from the symbol, n is 1 or 2 or 3 to determine the combination of the received mini-slots.
  27. 根据权利要求21或者22所述的装置,所述信号为上行信号,所述装置包括第五模块,用于:The apparatus according to claim 21 or 22, wherein said signal is an uplink signal, said apparatus comprising a fifth module, for:
    在所述第一符号位置集合的各个符号上,依次检测解调参考信号DMRS。The demodulation reference signal DMRS is sequentially detected on each symbol of the first symbol position set.
  28. 根据权利要求24所述的装置,所述信号为上行信号,所述装置包括第六模块,用于:The apparatus of claim 24, wherein said signal is an uplink signal, said apparatus comprising a sixth module for:
    在所述第一符号位置集合和所述第二符号位置集合并集的各个符号上,依次检测解调参考信号DMRS,以确定接收到的mini-slot的组合。On each of the symbols of the first set of symbol positions and the second set of symbol positions, the demodulation reference signal DMRS is sequentially detected to determine a combination of the received mini-slots.
PCT/CN2019/085667 2018-05-11 2019-05-06 Signal transmission method and device WO2019214577A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201810451022 2018-05-11
CN201810451022.8 2018-05-11
CN201810797873.8 2018-07-19
CN201810797873.8A CN110474752B (en) 2018-05-11 2018-07-19 Signal transmission method and device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2019214577A1 true WO2019214577A1 (en) 2019-11-14

Family

ID=68467732

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/085667 WO2019214577A1 (en) 2018-05-11 2019-05-06 Signal transmission method and device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2019214577A1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170332358A1 (en) * 2016-05-12 2017-11-16 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for uplink resource assignment for cellular network using unlicensed bands
CN107872818A (en) * 2016-09-27 2018-04-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Data processing method, node and terminal

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20170332358A1 (en) * 2016-05-12 2017-11-16 Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for uplink resource assignment for cellular network using unlicensed bands
CN107872818A (en) * 2016-09-27 2018-04-03 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Data processing method, node and terminal

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
"NR frame structure and scheduling on unlicensed bands", 3GPP TSG RAN WG1 MEETING #92BIS, R1-1803678, 20 April 2018 (2018-04-20), XP051412956 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20220368507A1 (en) Signal transmission method, related device, and system
WO2019184563A1 (en) Data transmission method, and device and system related thereto
US11363575B2 (en) Uplink information sending method and apparatus and uplink information receiving method and apparatus
US11218273B2 (en) Signal transmission method, related device, and system
CN109845382A (en) For sending the method and user equipment of uplink signal
JP2019071626A (en) Signal transmission configuration in wireless system
CN111108800B (en) Communication method and device
US8792459B2 (en) Methods and apparatus for joint scheduling of peer-to-peer links and wireless wide area network links in cellular networks
CN111699722B (en) Method for operating in idle mode and apparatus using the same
WO2020151754A1 (en) Ra-rnti processing method and apparatus
EP3739913A1 (en) Data transmission method, related devices, and system
US20210378009A1 (en) Initial signal detection method and apparatus
CN113950151A (en) Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) monitoring method, device and terminal
WO2019184574A1 (en) Data transmission method, and device and system related thereto
WO2019141069A1 (en) Method and device for managing channel occupancy duration of unlicensed frequency band
US20220053561A1 (en) Approaches for clear channel assessment
US11076423B2 (en) Apparatuses and methods for communicating in a wireless communication network
WO2020029070A1 (en) Method, apparatus and computer readable media for resource allocation
WO2019153358A1 (en) Channel transmission method and apparatus, and computer storage medium
CN112771974A (en) HARQ process management for multi-slot scheduling
WO2019214577A1 (en) Signal transmission method and device
CN110474752B (en) Signal transmission method and device
CN113273121A (en) Method, apparatus and computer readable medium for measuring sidelink received signal strength
CN112868261A (en) L1 signaling for serving cell
EP4351243A1 (en) Terminal, base station, and communication method

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19799814

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 19799814

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1